To our customers, Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding. Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com April 1st, 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com) Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry. Notice 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software, and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information. When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: "Standard", "High Quality", and "Specific". The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product's quality grade, as indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as "Specific" without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as "Specific" or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. "Standard": 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots. "High Quality": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anticrime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support. "Specific": Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further, Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries. (Note 1) "Renesas Electronics" as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majorityowned subsidiaries. (Note 2) "Renesas Electronics product(s)" means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics. 38D2 Group REJ03B0177-0302 Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER DESCRIPTION The 38D2 Group is the 8-bit microcomputer based on the 740 Family core technology. The 38D2 Group is pin-compatible with the 38C2 Group. The 38D2 Group has an LCD drive control circuit, an A/D converter, a serial interface, and a ROM correction function and on-chip oscillator as additional functions. The QzROM version and the flash memory version are available. The flash memory version does not have a selection function for the oscillation start mode. Only the on-chip oscillator starts oscillating. The various microcomputers include variations of memory size, and packaging. For details, refer to the section on part numbering. FEATURES * Power source voltage (QzROM version) [In frequency/2 mode] f(XIN) 12.5 MHz.............................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 4.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 2 MHz................................................... 1.8 to 5.5 V [In frequency/4 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 1.8 to 5.5 V [In frequency/8 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 1.8 to 5.5 V [In low-speed mode].............................................. 1.8 to 5.5 V Note. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. * Basic machine-language instructions ................................. 71 * The minimum instruction execution time ................... 0.32 s (at 12.5 MHz oscillation frequency) * Memory size (QzROM version) ROM ........................................................ 16 K to 60 K bytes RAM ........................................................... 640 to 2048 bytes * Memory size (Flash memory version) ROM ...................................................................... 60 K bytes RAM ...................................................................... 2048 bytes * Programmable input/output ports .. 51 (common to SEG: 24) * Interrupts ............................................. 18 sources, 16 vectors * Timers ..................................................... 8-bit x 4, 16-bit x 2 * Serial interface ....... 8-bit x 2 (UART or Clock-synchronized) * PWM .......... 10-bit x 2, 16-bit x 1 (common to IGBT output) * A/D converter .......................................... 10-bit x 8 channels (A/D converter can be operated in low-speed mode.) * Watchdog timer ......................................................... 8-bit x 1 * ROM correction function ....................... 32 bytes x 2 vectors * LED direct drive port ............................................................ 8 (average current: 15 mA, peak current: 30 mA, total current: 90 mA) * LCD drive control circuit Bias ............................................................................ 1/2, 1/3 Duty .............................................................................. 2, 3, 4 Common output .................................................................... 4 Segment output ................................................................... 24 * Main clock generating circuit ............................................... 1 (connect to external ceramic resonator or on-chip oscillator) * Sub-clock generating circuit ..................................................1 (connect to external quartz-crystal oscillator) * Power source voltage (Flash memory version) [In frequency/2 mode] f(XIN) 12.5 MHz.............................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 4.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 2.7 to 5.5 V [In frequency/4 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.7 to 5.5 V [In frequency/8 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.7 to 5.5 V [In low-speed mode].............................................. 2.7 to 5.5 V Note. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. * Power dissipation (QzROM version) * In frequency/2 mode ..................................... Typ. 32 mW (VCC = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) * In low-speed mode ........................................ Typ. 18 W (VCC = 2.5 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) * Power dissipation (Flash memory version) * In frequency/2 mode ..................................... Typ. 20 mW (VCC = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) * In low-speed mode ...................................... Typ. 1.1 mW (VCC = 2.7 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) * Operating temperature range ............................... -20 to 85C Flash Memory Mode * Program/Erase voltage ............................. VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V * Program method ....................... Programming in unit of byte * Erase method .................................................... Block erasing * Program/Erase control by software command APPLICATION Household products, Consumer electronics, etc. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 1 of 131 38D2 Group P0 4 /SEG 4 P0 5/SEG 5 P0 6/SEG 6 P0 7/SEG 7 P1 0/SEG 8 P1 1/SEG 9 P1 2/SEG 10 P1 3/SEG 11 P1 4/SEG 12 P1 5/SEG 13 P1 6/SEG 14 P1 7/SEG 15 P2 0/SEG 16 P2 1/SEG 17 P2 2/SEG 18 P2 3/SEG 19 PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 49 32 50 31 51 30 52 29 53 28 54 27 55 M38D2XGXFP/HP M38D29FFFP/HP 56 57 58 59 26 25 24 23 22 60 21 61 20 62 19 63 18 64 17 2 3 4 5 6 7 P4 5/AN 5 P4 4/AN 4 P4 3/AN 3 P4 2/ADKEY/AN 2 P4 1/O OUT1/AN 1 P40/O OUT0 /AN 0 OSCSEL (Note 1) 1 8 P24/SEG20 P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 VL3 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TXD2/(LED2) P33/RXD2/(LED3) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RESET P6 2 /X COUT P6 1/X CIN V SS X IN X OUT V CC P6 0 /CNTR 1 P3 7/CNTR 0/T XOUT2/(LED 7) P03/SEG3/(KW7) P02/SEG2/(KW6) P01/SEG1/(KW5) P00/SEG0/(KW4) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P54/RXD1/(KW0) P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P51/INT1 P50/INT0 AVSS VREF P47/RTP1/AN7 P46/RTP0/AN6 Note 1: CNVSS in flash memory version Package type : PLQP0064GA-A(64P6U-A)/PLQP0064KB-A(64P6Q-A) Fig. 1 Pin configuration (LQFP Package) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 2 of 131 38D2 Group Table 1 Performance overview Parameter Function Number of basic instructions 71 Instruction execution time 0.32 s (Minimum instruction, Oscillation frequency 12.5 MHz) Oscillation frequency 16 MHz (Maximum)(1) Memory sizes (QzROM version) ROM 16 K to 60 K bytes RAM 640 to 2048 bytes ROM Memory sizes (Flash memory version) RAM I/O port 60 K bytes 2048 bytes 8-bit x 6, 3-bit x 1 (24 pins sharing SEG) P0-P5, P60-P62 Interrupt 18 sources, 16 vectors (includes key input interrupt) Timer 8-bit x 4, 16-bit x 2 Serial Interface 8-bit x 2 (UART or Clock-synchronized) PWM 10-bit x 2, 16-bit x 1 (common to IGBT output) A/D converter 10-bit x 8 (operated in low-speed mode) Watchdog timer 8-bit x 1 ROM correction function 32 bytes x 2 vectors LED direct drive port 8 (average current: 15 mA, peak current: 30 mA, total current: 90 mA) LCD drive control circuit Bias 1/2, 1/3 Duty 2, 3, 4 Common output 4 Segment output 24 Main clock generating circuits Built-in (connect to external ceramic resonator or on-chip oscillator) Sub-clock generating circuits Power source voltage (QzROM version) Built-in (connect to external quartz-crystal oscillator) In frequency/2 mode f(XIN) 12.5 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V (1) f(XIN) 8 MHz 4.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz 2.0 to 5.5 V In frequency/4 mode In frequency/8 mode f(XIN) 2 MHz 1.8 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 16 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz 1.8 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 16 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz 1.8 to 5.5 V In low-speed mode Power source voltage In frequency/2 mode (Flash memory version) (1) 1.8 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 12.5 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz 2.7 to 5.5 V In frequency/4 mode f(XIN) 16 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz 2.7 to 5.5 V In frequency/8 mode f(XIN) 16 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz 2.7 to 5.5 V In low-speed mode Power dissipation (QzROM version) 2.7 to 5.5 V In frequency/2 mode Std. 32 mW (Vcc = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) In low-speed mode Std. 18 W (Vcc = 2.5 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) In frequency/2 mode Power dissipation (Flash memory version) In low-speed mode Input/Output characteristics 4.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz Input/Output withstand voltage Output current Operating temperature range Std. 20 mW (Vcc = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) Std. 1.1 mW (Vcc = 2.7 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) VCC 10 mA -20 to 85C Device structure CMOS silicon gate Package 64-pin plastic molded LQFP NOTE: 1. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 3 of 131 8 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fig. 2 Functional block diagram Page 4 of 131 8 8 Port P5 (8) 4 COM x 24 SEG LCD drive control circuit ROM correction 3 IGBT output PWM (16 bits) CPU core Watchdog timer PWM1 (10 bits) Timer 4 (8 bits) PWM0 (10 bits) Timer 3 (8 bits) Timer 2 (8 bits) Timer 1 (8 bits) Timer Y (16 bits) Port P6 (3) Serial I/O2 (UART or Clock synchronous) Serial I/O1 (UART or Clock synchronous) Serial I/O A/D converter 10-bits x 8-channels Timer Port P3 (8) Timer X (16 bits) Port P2 (8) Internal peripheral function Port P1 (8) 8 On-chip oscillator RAM RAM for LCD display (12 bytes) ROM Memory X IN -X OUT (Main clock) X CIN -X COUT (Sub-clock) System clock generation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Port P4 (8) Port P0 (8) 8 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM 38D2 Group 38D2 Group PIN DESCRIPTION Table 2 Pin description (1) Pin Name Function Function except a port function VCC, VSS Power source * Apply 1.8 to 5.5 V to VCC, and 0 V to VSS. RESET Reset input * Reset input pin for active "L". XIN Clock input XOUT Clock output * Input and output pins for the main clock generating circuit. * Connect a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator between the XIN and XOUT pins to set the oscillation frequency. When an external clock is used, connect the clock source to XIN, and leave XOUT pin open. * Feedback resistor is built in between XIN pin and XOUT pin. VL3 LCD power source * Input 0 VL1 VL2 VL3 voltage. * Input 0 - VL3 voltage to LCD. COM0- COM3 Common output * LCD common output pins. * COM2 and COM3 are not used at 1/2 duty ratio. * COM3 is not used at 1/3 duty ratio. P00/SEG0/(KW4)- P03/SEG3/(KW7) I/O port P0 * * * * P10/SEG8- P17/SEG15 I/O port P1 * * * * P20/SEG16- P25/SEG21 I/O port P2 * * * * P04/SEG4- P07/SEG7 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TxD2/(LED2) P33/RxD2/(LED3) I/O port P3 P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/ (LED6) * LCD segment 8-bit I/O port. output pins CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit. 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit. 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit. * Serial I/O2 function pins 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * External interrupt pin * Pull-up control is enabled in 4-bit unit. * Timer X, Timer 2 output pins * Timer X function pin I/O port P4 P42/AN2/ADKEY P43/AN3-P45/AN5 P46/RTP0/AN6 P47/RTP1/AN7 P50/INT0 P51/INT1 * LCD power source pins * * * * P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/ (LED7) P40/OOUT0/AN0 P41/OOUT1/AN1 * Key input interrupt input pins I/O port P5 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P54/RxD1/(KW0) P55/TxD1/(KW1) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 * A/D convertor 8-bit I/O port. input pins CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in 4-bit unit. * * * * * * * * 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in 4-bit unit Page 5 of 131 * Oscillation external output pins * ADKEY * Real time port function pins * External input pins * Timer 3, Timer 4 output pins * PWM output pins * Serial I/O1 function pins * Key input interrupt input pins 38D2 Group Table 3 Pin description (2) Pin P60/CNTR1 Name Function * * * * Oscillation start selection pin * Whether oscillation starts by an oscillator between the XIN and XOUT pins or an on-chip oscillator is selected. * VPP power source input pin in the QzROM writing mode. P61/XCIN P62/XCOUT OSCSEL (Only QzROM version) Function except a port function * Timer Y function pins .3-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. * Sub clock generating circuit I/O pins CMOS 3-state output structure. (oscillator connected) I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in 3-bit unit I/O port P6 CNVSS CNVSS (Only flash memory version) * Pin for controlling the operating mode of the chip. Connect to VSS. VREF Analog reference * Reference voltage input pin for A/D converter. voltage AVSS Analog power source Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 * Analog power source input pin for A/D converter. Connect to VSS. Page 6 of 131 38D2 Group PART NUMBERING Product M38D2 4 G 6 - XXX FP Package type FP: PLQP0064GA-A package HP: PLQP0064KB-A package ROM number Omitted in the shipped in blank version. ROM memory size 1 : 4096 bytes 9 : 36864 bytes 2 : 8192 bytes A : 40960 bytes 3 : 12288 bytes B : 45056 bytes 4 : 16384 bytes C : 49152 bytes 5 : 20480 bytes D : 53248 bytes 6 : 24576 bytes E : 57344 bytes 7 : 28672 bytes F : 61440 bytes 8 : 32768 bytes The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM are reserved areas ; they cannot be used. Memory type G : QzROM version F : Flash memory version RAM size 0 : 192 bytes 1 : 256 bytes 2 : 384 bytes 3 : 512 bytes 4 : 640 bytes 5 : 768 bytes 6 : 896 bytes 7 : 1024 bytes 8 : 1536 bytes 9 : 2048 bytes Fig. 3 Part numbering Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 7 of 131 38D2 Group GROUP EXPANSION Renesas plans to expand the 38D2 Group as follows. Memory Size * ROM size ................................................... 16 K to 60 K bytes * RAM size .................................................... 640 to 2048 bytes * ROM size ................................................................ 60 K bytes * RAM size ............................................................... 2048 bytes Packages * PLQP0064GA-A ...............0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded LQFP * PLQP0064KB-A ...............0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded LQFP Memory Expansion Plan Under development M38D29GF/FF ROM size 60K (bytes) 56K M38D29GC 48K 40K M38D28G8 32K 28K M38D24G6 24K 20K M38D24G4 16K 12K 8K 4K 192 256 384 512 640 768 896 1,024 1,536 2,048 RAM size (bytes) Products under development or planning : the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice. Fig. 4 Memory expansion plan Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 8 of 131 38D2 Group Currently supported products are listed below Table 4 . Support products Part No. As of August 2007 ROM size (bytes) ROM size for User in ( ) RAM size (bytes) M38D29GF-XXXFP M38D29GF-XXXHP M38D29GFFP 2048 M38D29GC-XXXFP M38D29GCFP Remarks PLQP0064GA-A 61440 (61310) M38D29GFHP M38D29GC-XXXHP Package PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A Blank PLQP0064KB-A Blank PLQP0064GA-A 49152 (49022) 2048 PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A Blank M38D29GCHP PLQP0064KB-A Blank M38D28G8-XXXFP PLQP0064GA-A M38D28G8-XXXHP M38D28G8FP 32768 (32638) 1536 PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A Blank M38D28G8HP PLQP0064KB-A Blank M38D24G6-XXXFP PLQP0064GA-A M38D24G6-XXXHP M38D24G6FP 24576 (24446) 640 PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A Blank M38D24G6HP PLQP0064KB-A Blank M38D24G4-XXXFP PLQP0064GA-A M38D24G4-XXXHP M38D24G4FP 16384 (16254) 640 M38D24G4HP M38D29FFFP 61440 M38D29FFHP Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 2048 PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A Blank PLQP0064GA-A Flash memory version PLQP0064KB-A Page 9 of 131 Blank PLQP0064KB-A 38D2 Group Table 5 Differences between QzROM and flash memory versions QzROM version Flash memory version Main clock XIN or on-chip oscillator selectable Oscillation circuit at reset and at returning from stop mode by OSCSEL pin On-chip oscillator Termination of OSCEL/CNVSS pin OSCSEL = "H" OSCSEL = "L" CNVSS = "L" Main clock oscillation at reset and at returning from stop mode Oscillation on Stop Stop On-chip oscillator oscillation at reset and at returning from stop mode Stop Oscillation on Oscillation on f(XIN)/8 f(OCO)/32 f(OCO)/32 Required Optional System clock oscillation at reset and at returning from stop mode Mounting of main clock oscillation circuit Optional On-chip oscillator oscillation in low speed-mode Stop Stop by setting the on-chip oscillator stop bit because it is not stopped. Writing "1" to on-chip oscillator stop bit in on-chip oscillator mode On-chip oscillator is stopped On-chip oscillator is not stopped Reset input "L" pulse width Absolute maximum rating: OSCSEL/CNVSS pin 2 s or more 2 ms or more -0.3 to 8.0 -0.3 to VCC + 0.3 Minimum operating power source voltage 1.8 V 2.7 V A/D converter minimum operating power source voltage 2.0 V 2.7 V NOTE: 1. For detailed specifications, confirm the descriptions in the Datasheet. Notes on Differences between QzROM and Flash Memory Versions (1) The memory map, the writing modes and programming circuits vary because of the differences in their internal memories. (2) The oscillation parameters of XIN-XOUT and XCIN-XCOUT may vary. (3) The QzROM version and the flash memory version MCUs differ in their manufacturing processes, built-in ROM, and layout patterns. Because of these differences, characteristic values, operation margins, A/D conversion accuracy, noise immunity, and noise radiation may vary within the specified range of electrical characteristics. (4) When switching from the flash memory version to the QzROM version, implement system evaluations equivalent to those implemented in the flash memory version. (5) The both operations except the electrical characteristics are same at the emulator (emulator MCU board: M38D29TRLFS). Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 10 of 131 38D2 Group FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Central Processing Unit (CPU) The 38D2 Group uses the standard 740 Family instruction set. Refer to the 740 Family Software Manual for details on the instruction set. Machine-resident 740 Family instructions are as follows: The FST and SLW instructions cannot be used. The STP, WIT, MUL, and DIV instructions can be used. The central processing unit (CPU) has six registers. Figure 5 shows the 740 Family CPU register structure. [Accumulator (A)] The accumulator is an 8-bit register. Data operations such as arithmetic data transfer, etc., are executed mainly through the accumulator. [Index Register X (X)] The index register X is an 8-bit register. In the index addressing modes, the value of the OPERAND is added to the contents of register X and specifies the real address. [Index Register Y (Y)] The index register Y is an 8-bit register. In partial instruction, the value of the OPERAND is added to the contents of register Y and specifies the real address. b7 [Stack Pointer (S)] The stack pointer is an 8-bit register used during subroutine calls and interrupts. This register indicates start address of stored area (stack) for storing registers during subroutine calls and interrupts. The low-order 8 bits of the stack address are determined by the contents of the stack pointer. The high-order 8 bits of the stack address are determined by the stack page selection bit. If the stack page selection bit is "0", the high-order 8 bits becomes "0016". If the stack page selection bit is "1", the high-order 8 bits becomes "0116". The operations of pushing register contents onto the stack and popping them from the stack are shown in Figure 6. Table 6 shows the push and pop instructions of accumulator or processor status register. Store registers other than those described in Figure 6 with program when the user needs them during interrupts or subroutine calls. [Program Counter (PC)] The program counter is a 16-bit counter consisting of two 8-bit registers PCH and PCL. It is used to indicate the address of the next instruction to be executed. b0 A b7 Accumulator b0 X b7 Index register X b0 Y b7 Index register Y b0 S b15 b7 PCH Stack pointer b0 PCL Program counter b7 b0 N V T B D I Z C Processor status register (PS) Carry flag Zero flag Interrupt disable flag Decimal mode flag Break flag Index X mode flag Overflow flag Negative flag Fig. 5 740 Family CPU register structure Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 11 of 131 38D2 Group On-going Routine Interrupt request (1) M(S) (PCH) Push return address on stack (S) (S) - 1 Execute JSR M(S) (PCL) M(S) (PCH) (S) (S) - 1 M(S) (PCL) ------------ Push return address on stack (S) (S) - 1 (S) (S) - 1 M(S) (PS) (S) (S) - 1 Interrupt Service Routine Subroutine ..... Execute RTI Execute RTS POP return address from stack Push contents of processor status register on stack (S) (S) + 1 (S) (S) + 1 (PS) M(S) (PCL) M(S) I Flag is set from "0" to "1" Fetch the jump vector POP contents of processor status register from stack (S) (S) + 1 (S) (S) + 1 (PCL) M(S) (PCH) M(S) (S) (S) + 1 POP return address from stack (PCH) M(S) Note1: Condition for acceptance of an interrupt request here Interrupt disable flag is "0" and Interrupt enable bit corresponding to each interrupt source is "1" Fig. 6 Register push and pop at interrupt generation and subroutine call Table 6 Push and pop instructions of accumulator or processor status register Push instruction to stack PHA PHP Accumulator Processor status register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 12 of 131 Pop instruction from stack PLA PLP 38D2 Group [Processor Status Register (PS)] The processor status register is an 8-bit register consisting of 5 flags which indicate the status of the processor after an arithmetic operation and 3 flags which decide MCU operation. Branch operations can be performed by testing the Carry (C) flag, Zero (Z) flag, Overflow (V) flag, or the Negative (N) flag. In decimal mode, the Z, V, N flags are not valid. * Bit 0: Carry flag (C) The C flag contains a carry or borrow generated by the arithmetic logic unit (ALU) immediately after an arithmetic operation. It can also be changed by a shift or rotate instruction. * Bit 1: Zero flag (Z) The Z flag is set to "1" if the result of an immediate arithmetic operation or a data transfer is "0", and set to "0" if the result is anything other than "0". * Bit 2: Interrupt disable flag (I) The I flag disables all interrupts except for the interrupt generated by the BRK instruction. Interrupts are disabled when the I flag is "1". * Bit 3: Decimal mode flag (D) The D flag determines whether additions and subtractions are executed in binary or decimal. Binary arithmetic is executed when this flag is "0"; decimal arithmetic is executed when it is "1". Decimal correction is automatic in decimal mode. Only the ADC and SBC instructions can be used for decimal arithmetic. Table 7 * Bit 4: Break flag (B) The B flag is used to indicate that the current interrupt was generated by the BRK instruction. When the BRK instruction is generated, the B flag is set to "1" automatically. When the other interrupts are generated, the B flag is set to "0", and the processor status register is pushed onto the stack. * Bit 5: Index X mode flag (T) When the T flag is "0", arithmetic operations are performed between accumulator and memory. When the T flag is "1", direct arithmetic operations and direct data transfers are enabled between memory locations. * Bit 6: Overflow flag (V) The V flag is used during the addition or subtraction of one byte of signed data. It is set if the result exceeds +127 to -128. When the BIT instruction is executed, bit 6 of the memory location operated on by the BIT instruction is stored in the overflow flag. * Bit 7: Negative flag (N) The N flag is set to "1" if the result of an arithmetic operation or data transfer is negative. When the BIT instruction is executed, bit 7 of the memory location operated on by the BIT instruction is stored in the negative flag. Set and clear instructions of each bit of processor status register Set instruction Clear instruction C flag SEC CLC Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Z flag - - Page 13 of 131 I flag SEI CLI D flag SED CLD B flag - - T flag SET CLT V flag - CLV N flag - - 38D2 Group [CPU Mode Register (CPUM)] 003B16 The CPU mode register contains the stack page selection bit, etc. This register is allocated at address 003B16. After the system is released from reset, the mode depends on the OSCSEL pin state in the QzROM version. When the OSCSEL pin state is GND level, only the on-chip oscillator starts oscillation. The XIN -XOUT oscillation stops oscillating, and XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. The operating mode is the on-chip oscillator mode. When the OSCSEL pin state is Vcc level, the X IN -X OUT oscillation divided by 8 starts oscillation. The on-chip oscillator stops oscillating, and the XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. The operating mode is the frequency/8 mode. In the flash memory version, only the on-chip oscillator starts oscillating. The XIN-XOUT oscillation stops oscillating, and the XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. The operating mode is the on-chip oscillator mode. When the main clock or sub-clock is used, after the XIN-XOUT oscillation and the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation are enabled, wait in the on-chip oscillator mode etc. until the oscillation stabilizes, and then switch the operation mode. When the main clock is not used (XIN-XOUT oscillation and an external clock input are not used), connect the XIN pin to VCC through a resistor and leave XOUT open. [CPU Mode Register 2 (CPUM2)] 001116 The CPU mode register 2 contains the control bits for the on-chip oscillator. The CPU mode register 2 is allocated at address 001116. CPU mode register 2 CPUM2 CM8 (address 001116, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, initial value: 0016) ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, initial value: 0116) ( Flash memory version, initial value: 0016) b7 b0 On-chip oscillator stop bit (1) 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Not used (do not write "1") Not used (returns "0" when read) Not used (do not write "1") CPU mode register CPUM CM7 CM6 CM5 CM4 CM3 CM2 CM1 CM0 (address 003B16, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, initial value: E016) ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, initial value: 4016) ( Flash memory version, initial value: E016) b7 b0 Processor mode bits b1 b0 0 0 : Single-chip mode 0 1: 1 0 : Not available 1 1: Stack page selection bit 0 : 0 page 1 : 1 page Internal system clock selection bit 0 : Main clock selected (includes OCO, XIN) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT selected Port Xc switch bit (2) 0 : I/O port function (Oscillation stop) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT oscillating function XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit (3) 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Main clock division ratio selection bit (Valid only when CM3=0) (4) b7 b6 0 0 1 1 0 : f(XIN)/2 (frequency/2 mode) 1 : f(XIN)/8 (frequency/8 mode) 0 : f(XIN)/4 (frequency/4 mode) 1 : On-chip oscillator Notes 1: When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 (bit 5 of watchdog timer control register (address 002916)), the on-chip oscillator does not stop even when the on-chip oscillator stop bit is set to "1". Also, when the low-speed mode is set, the on-chip oscillator stops regardless of the value of this bit in the QzROM version. The on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, so set this bit to "1" to stop the oscillation. In on-chip oscillator mode, even if this bit is set to "1", the on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, but stops in the QzROM version. 2: In low-speed mode, the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation stops if the port XC switch bit is set to "0". 3: In XIN mode, the XIN-XOUT oscillation does not stop even if the XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit is set to "1". 4: 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. Fig. 7 Structure of CPU mode register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 14 of 131 38D2 Group Reset OSCSEL ? H L Wait by operation until establishment After releasing reset N Low-speed/XIN mode ? Start with an on-chip oscillator. Initial value of CPUM is E016. Initial value of CPUM2 is 0016. As for the details of condition for transition among each mode, refer to the state transition of system clock. After releasing reset The CPU starts its operation in the built-in XIN mode. Initial value of CPUM is 4016. Initial value of CPUM2 is 0116. Y Start the oscillation (bits 4 and 5 of CPUM) Wait by on-chip oscillator operation until establishment of oscillator clock Select internal system clock (bit 3 of CPUM or bit 7, 6 = "01") Switch the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 7, 6 = "00" or "10") Oscillator starts oscillation. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM until oscillation stabilizes. System can operate in on-chip oscillator mode until oscillation stabilize. Select internal system clock. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM at the same time. Select main clock division ratio. Switch to frequency/2 or frequency/4 mode here, if necessary. Main routine Reset After releasing reset N Low-speed/XIN mode ? Start with an on-chip oscillator. Initial value of CPUM is E016. Initial value of CPUM2 is 0016. As for the details of condition for transition among each mode, refer to the state transition of system clock. Y Start the oscillation (bits 4 and 5 of CPUM) Oscillator starts oscillation. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM until oscillation stabilizes. Wait by on-chip oscillator operation until establishment of oscillator clock System can operate in on-chip oscillator mode until oscillation stabilize. Select internal system clock (bit 3 of CPUM or bit 7, 6 = "01") Select internal system clock. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM at the same time. Switch the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 7, 6 = "00" or "10") Select main clock division ratio. Switch to frequency/2 or 4 mode here, if necessary. Main routine Fig. 8 Switch procedure of CPU mode register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 15 of 131 38D2 Group MEMORY * Special Function Register (SFR) Area The Special Function Register area in the zero page contains control registers such as I/O ports and timers. * RAM RAM is used for data storage and for stack area of subroutine calls and interrupts. * ROM In the QzROM version, the first 128 Kbytes and the last 2 bytes are reserved for device testing and the rest is the user area. Also, 1 byte of address FFDB16 is reserved. In the flash memory version, programming and erase operations can be performed to reserved ROM areas. * Interrupt Vector Area The interrupt vector area contains reset and interrupt vectors. * Zero Page Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the zero page addressing mode. * Special Page Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the special page addressing mode. RAM area RAM size (bytes) 192 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 1536 2048 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 * After a reset, the contents of RAM are undefined. Make sure to set the initial value before use. * When Renesas ships QzROM write products, we write ROM option data* specified by the mask file converter MM to the ROM code protect address. Therefore, set FF16 to the ROM code protect address in ROM data regardless of the presence or absence of a protect. When data other than FF16 is set, we may ask that the ROM data be submitted again. * ROM option data: mask option noted in MM 000016 Address XXXX16 00FF16 013F16 01BF16 023F16 02BF16 033F16 03BF16 043F16 063F16 083F16 RAM SFR area 004016 LCD display RAM area 004C16 Zero page 010016 (2) XXXX16 Reserved area 084016 0FD016 0FE016 0FEF16 0FF016 ROM area ROM size (bytes) * ROM Code Protect Address in QzROM Version (Address FFDB16) Address FFDB16 as reserved ROM area in the QzROM version is ROM code protect address. "0016" or "FE16" is written into this address when selecting the protect bit write by using a serial programmer and selecting protect enabled for writing shipment by Renesas Technology Corp. When "0016" or "FE16" is set to the ROM code protect address, the protect function is enabled, so that reading or writing from/to the corresponding area is disabled by a serial programmer. As for the QzROM product in blank, the ROM code is protected by selecting the protect bit write at ROM writing with a serial programmer. The protect can be performed, dividing twice. The protect area 1 is from the beginning address of ROM to address "EFFF16". As for the QzROM product shipped after writing, "0016" (protect enabled to all area), "FE16" (protect enabled to the protect area 1) or "FF16" (protect disabled) is written into the ROM code protect address when Renesas Technology Corp. performs writing. The writing of "0016 ", "FE16 " or "FF16" can be selected as ROM option setup ("MASK option" written in the mask file converter) when ordering. For the ROM code protect in the flash memory version, refer to the "FLASH MEMORY MODE". Address YYYY16 Address ZZZZ16 F00016 E00016 D00016 C00016 B00016 A00016 900016 800016 700016 600016 500016 400016 300016 200016 100016 F08016 E08016 D08016 C08016 B08016 A08016 908016 808016 708016 608016 508016 408016 308016 208016 108016 Not used Reserved area SFR area(1) SFR area 100016 YYYY16 Reserved ROM area (128 bytes) Protect area 1 ZZZZ16 EFFF16 (2) ROM FF0016 FFD416 Reserved ROM area(1) FFDB16 Reserved ROM area (ID code) FFDC16 FFFE16 FFFF16 (ROM code protect) Special page Interrupt vector area Reserved ROM area Note 1: This area is available in the flash memory version only. 2: ROM correction vectors are assigned. As for the details, refer to the "ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION". 3: In the flash memory version, programming and erase operations can be performed to reserved ROM areas. Note that their areas are different from those in the QzROM version. Fig. 9 Memory map diagram Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 16 of 131 38D2 Group 000016 Port P0 (P0) 002016 Timer 1 (T1) 000116 Port P0 direction register (P0D) 002116 Timer 2 (T2) 000216 Port P1 (P1) 002216 Timer 3 (T3) 000316 Port P1 direction register (P1D) 002316 Timer 4 (T4) 000416 Port P2 (P2) 002416 PWM01 register (PWM01) 000516 Port P2 direction register (P2D) 002516 Timer 12 mode register (T12M) 000616 Port P3 (P3) 002616 Timer 34 mode register (T34M) 000716 Port P3 direction register (P3D) 002716 Timer 1234 mode register (T1234M) 000816 Port P4 (P4) 002816 Timer 1234 frequency division selection register (PRE1234) 000916 Port P4 direction register (P4D) 002916 Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON) 000A16 Port P5 (P5) 002A16 Timer X (low-order) (TXL) 002B16 Timer X (high-order) (TXH) 000B16 Port P5 direction register (P5D) 000C16 Port P6 (P6) 000D16 Port P6 direction register (P6D) 002C16 Timer X (extension) (TXEX) 002D16 Timer X mode register (TXM) 002E16 Timer X control register 1 (TXCON1) 002F16 Timer X control register 2 (TXCON2) 000E16 000F16 001016 Oscillation output control register (OSCOUT) 003016 Compare register 1 (low-order) (COMP1L) 001116 CPU mode register 2 (CPUM2) 003116 Compare register 1 (high-order) (COMP1H) 001216 RRF register (RRFR) 003216 Compare register 2 (low-order) (COMP2L) 001316 LCD mode register (LM) 003316 Compare register 2 (high-order) (COMP2H) 001416 LCD power control register (VLCON) 003416 Compare register 3 (low-order) (COMP3L) 001516 AD control register (ADCON) 003516 Compare register 3 (high-order) (COMP3H) 001616 AD conversion register (low-order) (ADL) 003616 Timer Y (low-order) (TYL) 001716 AD conversion register (high-order) (ADH) 003716 Timer Y (high-order) (TYH) 001816 Transmit/receive buffer register 1 (TB1/RB1) 003816 Timer Y mode register (TYM) 001916 Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) 003916 Timer Y control register (TYCON) 001A16 Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) 001B16 UART1 control register (UART1CON) 003A16 Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) 001C16 Baud rate generator 1 (BRG1) 003C16 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) 001D16 Transmit/receive buffer register 2 (TB2/RB2) 003D16 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) 001E16 Serial I/O2 status register (SIO2STS) 003E16 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) 001F16 Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON) 003F16 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) 0FE016 Flash memory control register 0 (FMCR0) 0FF016 PULL register (PULL) 0FE116 Flash memory control register 1 (FMCR1) 0FF116 UART2 control register (UART2CON) 0FE216 Flash memory control register 2 (FMCR2) 0FF216 Baud rate generator 2 (BRG2) 0FE316 Reserved (1) 0FF316 Clock output control register (CKOUT) 0FE416 Reserved (1) 0FF416 Segment output disable register 0 (SEG0) 0FE516 Reserved (1) 0FF516 Segment output disable register 1 (SEG1) 0FE616 Reserved (1) 0FF616 Segment output disable register 2 (SEG2) 0FE716 Reserved (1) 0FF716 Key input control register (KIC) 0FE816 Reserved (1) 0FF816 ROM correction address 1 high-order register (RCA1H) 0FE916 Reserved (1) 0FF916 ROM correction address 1 low-order register (RCA1L) 0FEA16 Reserved (1) 0FFA16 ROM correction address 2 high-order register (RCA2H) 0FEB16 Reserved (1) 0FFB16 ROM correction address 2 low-order register (RCA2L) 003B16 CPU mode register (CPUM) 0FEC16 Reserved (1) 0FED16 Reserved (1) 0FFC16 ROM correction enable register (RCR) 0FEE16 Reserved (1) 0FFE16 Reserved (1) 0FEF16 Reserved (1) 0FFF16 Reserved (1) 0FFD16 Reserved (1) Note 1: The blanks are reserved. Do not write data to these areas. 2: No memory access is allowed to the blank areas within the SFRs. 3: Addresses 0FE016 to 0FEF16 are available in the flash memory version only. Fig. 10 Memory map of special function register (SFR) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 17 of 131 38D2 Group I/O PORTS * Direction Registers The I/O ports P0-P6 have direction registers which determine the input/output direction of each individual pin. Each bit in a direction register corresponds to one pin, each pin can be set to be input port or output port. When "0" is written to the bit of the direction register, the corresponding pin becomes an input pin. As for ports P0-P2, when "1" is written to the bit of the direction register and the segment output disable register, the corresponding pin becomes an output pin. As for ports P3-P6, when "1" is written to the bit of the direction register, the corresponding pin becomes an output pin. If data is read from a pin set to output, the value of the port latch is read, not the value of the pin itself. However, when peripheral output (RTP1, RTP0, TXOUT1, T4OUT, T3OUT, T2OUT/CKOUT, OOUT0, and OOUT1) is selected, the output value is read. Pins set to input are floating. If a pin set to input is written to, only the port output latch is written to and the pin remains floating. * Pull-up Control Each individual bit of ports P0-P2 can be pulled up with a program by setting direction registers and segment output disable registers 0 to 2 (addresses 0FF416 to 0FF616). The pin is pulled up by setting "0" to the direction register and "1" to the segment output disable register. By setting the PULL register (addresses 0FF016), ports P3-P6 can control pull-up with a program. However, the contents of PULL register do not affect ports programmed as the output ports. Segment output disable register Direction register "0" b7 b0 P30-P33 pull-up P34-P37 pull-up P40-P43 pull-up P44-P47 pull-up P50-P53 pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up P54-P57 pull-up P60-P62 pull-up Not used (return "0" when read) b7 b0 b7 b0 Input port Pull-up "1" Segment output Port output Fig. 11 Structure of ports P0 to P2 b7 b0 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up Segment output disable register 1 (SEG1 : address 0FF516) P10 pull-up P11 pull-up P12 pull-up P13 pull-up P14 pull-up P15 pull-up P16 pull-up P17 pull-up Initial state Input port No pull-up Segment output disable register 0 (SEG0 : address 0FF416) P00 pull-up P01 pull-up P02 pull-up P03 pull-up P04 pull-up P05 pull-up P06 pull-up P07 pull-up "1" "0" PULL register (PULL : address 0FF016) 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up Segment output disable register 2 (SEG2 : address 0FF616) P20 pull-up P21 pull-up P22 pull-up P23 pull-up P24 pull-up P25 pull-up P26 pull-up P27 pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up Notes 1: The PULL register and segment output disable register affect only ports programmed as the input ports. 2: When the VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) of the LCD power control register (address 0014 16) is "1", settings of P26 and P27 are invalid. Fig. 12 Structure of PULL register and segment output disable register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 18 of 131 38D2 Group Table 8 List of I/O port function Pin P00/SEG0/(KW4)- P03/SEG3/(KW7) Name Port P0 Input/Output I/O format Non-port function Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level LCD segment individual bits CMOS 3-state output output Key input (key-on wakeup) interrupt input Related SFRs Ref. No. Segment output disable register 0 (1) P04/SEG4- P07/SEG7 (2) P10/SEG8- P17/SEG15 Port P1 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level individual bits CMOS 3-state output Segment output disable register 1 P20/SEG16- P25/SEG21 Port P2 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level individual bits CMOS 3-state output Segment output disable register 2 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 LCD power input Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level Serial I/O2 function I/O individual bits CMOS 3-state output PULL register Serial I/O2 control register Serial I/O2 status register UART2 control register (3) (4) (5) (6) P34/INT2/(LED4) External interrupt input PULL register Interrupt edge selection register (7) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) Timer X output 1 PULL register (8) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT /(LED6) Timer 2 output Timer X mode register Timer 12 mode register Clock output control register (9) P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2 /(LED7) Timer X function input Timer X output 2 PULL register Timer X mode register (10) PULL register AD control register Oscillation output control register (13) P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TXD2/(LED2) P33/RXD2/(LED3) P40/OOUT0/AN0 P41/OOUT1/AN1 Port P3 Port P4 Oscillation external output pins Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level individual bits CMOS 3-state output P42/AN2/ADKEY Clock output A/D conversion input P43/AN3-P45/AN5 P46/RTP0/AN6 P47/RTP1/AN7 P50/INT0 P51/INT1 Real time port function output Port P5 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level External interrupt input individual bits CMOS 3-state output P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P53/T4OUT/PWM1 Timer 3 output Timer 4 output PWM output P54/RXD1/(KW0) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) Serial I/O1 function I/O P60/CNTR1 Port P6 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level Timer Y function input individual bits CMOS 3-state output P61/XCIN Sub-clock oscillation circuit P62/XCOUT COM0 -COM3 Key input (key-on wakeup) interrupt input Common Output LCD common output PULL register (11) AD control register (12) PULL register AD control register Timer Y mode register (13) PULL register Interrupt edge selection register (7) PULL register Timer 34 mode register (9) PULL register Serial I/O1 control register Serial I/O1 status register UART1 control register (14) (15) (16) (17) PULL register Timer Y mode register (7) PULL register (18) CPU mode register (19) LCD mode register (20) Notes 1: For details of how to use double/triple function ports as function I/O ports, refer to the applicable sections. 2: Make sure that the input level at each pin is either 0 V or VCC during execution of the STP instruction. When an input level is at an intermediate potential, a current will flow from VCC to VSS through the input-stage gate. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 19 of 131 38D2 Group (1) Ports P00-P03 (2) Ports P04-P07, P1, P2 VL2/VL3 VL2/VL3 Segment output disable bit Segment output disable bit Segment data Segment data VL1/VSS VL1/VSS Segment output disable bit Segment output disable bit Direction register Direction register Data bus Data bus Port latch Key-on wakeup interrupt input Port latch Key input control LCD power input (VL1,VL2) only for P26, P27 (4) Port P31 (3) Port P30 Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit SRDY2 output enable bit Pull-up control Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Direction register Data bus Pull-up control Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Direction register Data bus Port latch Serial I/O ready output Port latch Serial I/O clock output Serial I/O clock input (5) Port P32 (6) Port P33 P32/TxD2 P-channel output disable bit Serial I/O enable bit Transmit enable bit Direction register Data bus Pull-up control Serial I/O output Pull-up control Direction register Data bus Port latch Port latch Serial I/O input Fig. 13 Port block diagram (1) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Serial I/O enable bit Receive enable bit Page 20 of 131 38D2 Group (7) Ports P34, P50, P51, P60 (8) Port P35 Pull-up control Pull-up control Direction register Data bus Direction register Data bus Port latch Port latch Pulse output mode Timer X output CNTR1 interrupt input INT0-INT2 interrupt input (9) Ports P36, P52, P53 (10) Ports P37 Pull-up control Pull-up control Direction register Data bus Direction register Port latch Data bus Port/Timer output selection Timer output/PWM output Timer output/System clock output Port latch Port/Timer output selection Timer output CNTR0 interrupt input (11) Ports P42 (12) Ports P43-P45 Pull-up control Pull-up control Direction register Direction register Data bus Port latch Data bus Port latch ADKEY enable bit Analog input pin selection bit A-D conversion input A-D conversion input Analog input pin selection bit (14) Port P54 (13) Ports P40, P41, P46, P47 Pull-up control Direction register Data bus Direction register Port latch Oscillation output control bit/ Real time control bit Oscillation output/ Data for real time port Data bus A-D conversion input Analog input pin selection bit Fig. 14 Port block diagram (2) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Pull-up control Serial I/O enable bit Receive enable bit Page 21 of 131 Port latch Serial I/O input Key-on wakeup interrupt input Key input control 38D2 Group (16) Port P56 (15) Port P55 P55/TxD1 P-channel output disable bit Serial I/O enable bit Transmit enable bit Direction register Data bus Pull-up control Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Pull-up control Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Direction register Port latch Data bus Serial I/O output Port latch Serial I/O clock output Serial I/O clock input Key input control Key-on wakeup interrupt input Key-on wakeup interrupt input (18) Port P61 (17) Port P57 Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit SRDY1 output enable bit Xc oscillation enabled + Pull-up control Pull-up control Xc oscillation enabled Direction register Direction register Data bus Data bus Port latch Port latch Serial I/O ready output Sub-clock generation circuit input Key input control Key-on wakeup interrupt input (19) Port P62 Xc oscillation enabled + Pull-up control (20) COM0-COM3 VL3 Xc oscillation enabled Direction register Data bus Key input control VL2 Oscillator Port P61 Xc oscillation enabled Fig. 15 Port block diagram (3) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Gate input signal of each gate depends on the duty ratio and bias values. VL1 Port latch Page 22 of 131 VSS 38D2 Group * Termination of unused pins * Termination of common pins I/O ports: Select an input port or an output port and follow each processing method. In addition, it is recommended that related registers be overwritten periodically to prevent malfunctions, etc. Output ports: Open. Input ports: If the input level become unstable, through current flow to an input circuit, and the power supply current may increase. Table 9 Especially, when expecting low consumption current (at STP or WIT instruction execution etc.), pull-up or pull-down input ports to prevent through current (built-in resistor can be used). We recommend processing unused pins through a resistor which can secure IOH(avg) or IOL(avg). Because, when an I/O port or a pin which have an output function is selected as an input port, it may operate as an output port by incorrect operation etc. Termination of unused pins Pin Termination 1 Termination 2 Termination 3 When selecting SEG output, open. - P30/SRDY2/(LED0), P57/SRDY1/(KW3) When selecting SRDY function, perform termination of output port. - P31/SCLK2/(LED1), P56/SCLK1/(KW2) When selecting external clock input, perform termination of input port. P32/TXD2/(LED2), P55/TXD1/(KW1) When selecting TxD function, perform termination of output port. - P33/RXD2/(LED3), P54/RXD1/(KW0) When selecting RxD function, perform termination of input port. - P34/INT2/(LED4) When selecting INT function, perform termination of input port. - P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) When selecting TXOUT function, perform termination of output port. - P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6) When selecting T2OUT function or CKOUT function, perform termination of output port. - P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/(LED7) When selecting TXOUT function, perform termination of output port. - P40/OOUT0/AN0, P41/OOUT1/AN1 When selecting AN function, these pins can be opened. (A/D conversion result cannot be guaranteed.) P00/SEG0/(KW4)-P07/SEG7 I/O port P10/SEG8-P17/SEG15 P20/SEG16-P27/SEG23/VL2 P42/AN2/ADKEY P43/AN3-P47/RTP1/AN7 When selecting internal clock output, perform termination of output port. When selecting oscillation output, perform termination of output port. When selecting ADKEY function, pull-up this pin through a resistor. - P50/INT0, P51/INT1 When selecting INT function, perform termination of input port. - P52/T3OUT/PWM0, P53/T4OUT/PWM1 When selecting PWM, T3OUT, or T4OUT function, perform termination of output port. - P60/CNTR1 When selecting CNTR input function, perform termination of input port. - P61/XCIN, P62/XCOUT Do not select XCIN-XCOUT oscillation function by program. - Set the VL3 connect bit to "0" and leave the VL3 pin open. - VL3 Set the VL3 connect bit to "1" and apply a Vcc level voltage to VL3 pin. COM0-COM3 Open - - AVss Connect to Vss - - VREF Connect to Vcc - - XIN When only on-chip oscillator is used, connect to VCC through a resistor. - - XOUT When external clock is input or when only on-chip oscillator is used, open. - - Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 23 of 131 38D2 Group INTERRUPTS The 38D2 Group interrupts are vector interrupts with a fixed priority scheme, and generated by 16 sources among 18 sources: 6 external, 11 internal, and 1 software. The interrupt sources, vector addresses(1), and interrupt priority are shown in Table 10. Each interrupt except the BRK instruction interrupt has the interrupt request bit and the interrupt enable bit. These bits and the interrupt disable flag (I flag) control the acceptance of interrupt requests. Figure 16 shows an interrupt control diagram. An interrupt requests is accepted when all of the following conditions are satisfied: * Interrupt disable flag ................................ "0" * Interrupt request bit .................................. "1" * Interrupt enable bit ................................... "1" Though the interrupt priority is determined by hardware, priority processing can be performed by software using the above bits and flag. Table 10 Interrupt vector addresses and priority Interrupt Source Priority Vector Addresses(1) High Low Interrupt Request Generating Conditions Remarks Reset (2) 1 FFFD16 FFFC16 At reset Non-maskable INT0 2 FFFB16 FFFA16 At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT0 input External interrupt (active edge selectable) INT1 3 FFF916 FFF816 At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT1 input External interrupt (active edge selectable) INT2 4 FFF716 FFF616 At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT2 input Valid when INT2 interrupt is selected External interrupt (active edge selectable) At falling of ports P00-P03, P54-P57 input logical level AND Valid when key input interrupt is selected External interrupt (falling valid) External interrupt (active edge selectable) Key input (key-on wakeup) CNTR0 5 FFF516 FFF416 At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR0 input Timer X 6 FFF316 FFF216 At timer X underflow Timer 1 7 FFF116 FFF016 At timer 1 underflow Valid when timer 1 interrupt is selected Timer 2 8 FFEF16 FFEE16 At timer 2 underflow Valid when timer 2 interrupt is selected Timer 3 9 FFED16 FFEC16 At timer 3 underflow Valid when timer 3 interrupt is selected Timer 4 10 FFEB16 FFEA16 At timer 4 underflow Valid when timer 4 interrupt is selected Serial I/O1 receive 11 FFE916 FFE816 At completion of serial I/O1 data receive Valid only when serial I/O1 is selected Serial I/O1 transmit 12 FFE716 FFE616 At completion of serial I/O1 transmit shift or transmit buffer is empty Serial I/O2 receive 13 FFE516 FFE416 At completion of serial I/O2 data receive Valid only when serial I/O2 is selected Serial I/O2 transmit 14 FFE316 FFE216 At completion of serial I/O2 data Valid only when serial I/O2 is selected transmit shift or transmit buffer is empty Timer Y 15 FFE116 FFE016 At timer Y underflow At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR1 input CNTR1 Valid only when serial I/O1 is selected External interrupt (active edge selectable) A/D conversion 16 FFDF16 FFDE16 At completion of A/D conversion Valid when A/D interrupt is selected BRK instruction 17 FFDD16 FFDC16 At BRK instruction execution Non-maskable software interrupt Notes 1:Vector addresses contain interrupt jump destination addresses. 2:Reset function in the same way as an interrupt with the highest priority. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 24 of 131 38D2 Group Interrupt request bit Interrupt enable bit Interrupt disable flag (I) BRK instruction Reset Interrupt acceptance Fig. 16 Interrupt control * Interrupt Disable Flag The interrupt disable flag is assigned to bit 2 of the processor status register. This flag controls the acceptance of all interrupt requests except for the BRK instruction. When this flag is set to "1", the acceptance of interrupt requests is disabled. When it is set to "0", acceptance of interrupt requests is enabled. This flag is set to "1" with the SEI instruction and set to "0" with the CLI instruction. When an interrupt request is accepted, the contents of the processor status register are pushed onto the stack while the interrupt disable flag remains set to "0". Subsequently, this flag is automatically set to "1" and multiple interrupts are disabled. To use multiple interrupts, set this flag to "0" with the CLI instruction within the interrupt processing routine. The contents of the processor status register are popped off the stack with the RTI instruction. * Interrupt Request Bits Once an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding interrupt request bit is set to "1" and remains "1" until the request is accepted . Wh en the request is accepted, th is bit is automatically set to "0". Each interrupt request bit can be set to "0", but cannot be set to "1", by software. * Interrupt Enable Bits The interrupt enable bits control the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt requests. When an interrupt enable bit is set to "0", the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs in this condition, the corresponding interrupt request bit is set to "1", but the interrupt request is not accepted. When an interrupt enable bit is set to "1", acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. Each interrupt enable bit can be set to "0" or "1" by software. The interrupt enable bit for an unused interrupt should be set to "0". Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 25 of 131 * Interrupt Source Selection Any of the following combinations can be selected by the interrupt edge selection register (003A16). * INT2 or key input * Timer Y or CNTR1 38D2 Group b7 b0 Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE : address 003A16) INT0 interrupt edge selection bit INT1 interrupt edge selection bit INT2 interrupt edge selection bit INT2/Key input interrupt switch bit Timer Y/CNTR1 interrupt switch bit Not used (Do not write to "1".) Not used (return "0" when read) b7 b0 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1 : address 003C16) 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active 0 : INT2 interrupt 1 : Key input interrupt 0 : Timer Y interrupt 1 : CNTR1 interrupt b7 b0 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2 : address 003D16) Timer 4 interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit Serial I/O2 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O2 transmit interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt request bit CNTR1 interrupt request bit AD conversion interrupt request bit Not used (returns "0" when read) INT0 interrupt request bit INT1 interrupt request bit INT2 interrupt request bit Key input interrupt request bit CNTR0 interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer 1 interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 3 interrupt request bit b7 b0 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1 : address 003E16) INT0 interrupt enable bit INT1 interrupt enable bit INT2 interrupt enable bit Key input interrupt enable bit CNTR0 interrupt enable bit Timer X interrupt enable bit Timer 1 interrupt enable bit Timer 2 interrupt enable bit Timer 3 interrupt enable bit 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued b7 b0 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2 : address 003F16) Timer 4 interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 receive interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 transmit interrupt enable bit Timer Y interrupt enable bit CNTR1 interrupt enable bit AD conversion interrupt enable bit Not used (Do not write to "1".) 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled Fig. 17 Structure of interrupt-related registers Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 26 of 131 38D2 Group * Interrupt Request Generation, Acceptance, and Handling Interrupts have the following three phases. (i) Interrupt Request Generation An interrupt request is generated by an interrupt source (external interrupt signal input, timer underflow, etc.) and the corresponding request bit is set to "1". (ii) Interrupt Request Acceptance Based on the interrupt acceptance timing in each instruction cycle, the interrupt control circuit determines acceptance conditions (interrupt request bit, interrupt enable bit, and interrupt disable flag) and interrupt priority levels for accepting interrupt requests. When two or more interrupt requests are generated simultaneously, the highest priority interrupt is accepted. The value of interrupt request bit for an unaccepted interrupt remains the same and acceptance is determined at the next interrupt acceptance timing point. (iii) Handling of Accepted Interrupt Request The accepted interrupt request is processed. Figure 18 shows the time up to execution in the interrupt routine, and Figure 19 shows the interrupt sequence. Figure 20 shows the timing of interrupt request generation, interrupt request bit, and interrupt request acceptance. * Interrupt Handling Execution When interrupt handling is executed, the following operations are performed automatically. (1) Once the currently executing instruction is completed, an interrupt request is accepted. (2) The contents of the program counters and the processor status register at this point are pushed onto the stack area in order from 1 to 3. 1. High-order bits of program counter (PCH) 2. Low-order bits of program counter (PCL) 3. Processor status register (PS) (3) Concurrently with the push operation, the jump address of the corresponding interrupt (the start address of the interrupt processing routine) is transferred from the interrupt vector to the program counter. (4) The interrupt request bit for the corresponding interrupt is set to "0". Also, the interrupt disable flag is set to "1" and multiple interrupts are disabled. (5) The interrupt routine is executed. (6) When the RTI instruction is executed, the contents of the registers pushed onto the stack area are popped off in the order from 3 to 1. Then, the routine that was before running interrupt processing resumes. As described above, it is necessary to set the stack pointer and the jump address in the vector area corresponding to each interrupt to execute the interrupt processing routine. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 27 of 131 Interrupt request generated Interrupt request acceptance Interrupt routine starts Interrupt sequence Stack push and Vector fetch Main routine * 0 to 16 cycles Interrupt handling routine 7 cycles 7 to 23 cycles * When executing DIV instruction Fig. 18 Time up to execution in interrupt routine Push onto stack Vector fetch Execute interrupt routine SYNC RD WR Address bus Data bus PC Not used S,SPS S-1,SPS S-2,SPS PCH PCL PS BL BH AL AL,AH AH SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle (This is an internal signal that cannot be observed from the external unit.) BL, BH: Vector address of each interrupt AL, AH: Jump destination address of each interrupt SPS : "0016" or "0116" ([SPS] is a page selected by the stack page selection bit of CPU mode register.) Fig. 19 Interrupt sequence 38D2 Group The interrupt request bit may be set to "1" in the following cases. * When setting the external interrupt active edge Related bits: INT0 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 0 of interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16)) INT1 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 1 of interrupt edge selection register) INT2 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 2 of interrupt edge selection register) CNTR0 activate edge switch bit (bits 6 and 7 of timer X control register 1 (address 002E16)) CNTR1 activate edge switch bit (bits 6 of timer Y mode register (address 003816)) * When switching the interrupt sources of an interrupt vector address where two or more interrupt sources are assigned Related bit: Timer Y/CNTR1 interrupt switch bit (bit 3 of interrupt edge selection register) If it is not necessary to generate an interrupt synchronized with these settings, take the following sequence. (1) Set the corresponding enable bit to "0" (disabled). (2) Set the interrupt edge selection bit (the active edge switch bit) or the interrupt source bit. (3) Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to "0" after one or more instructions have been executed. (4) Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled). Push onto stack Vector fetch Instruction cycle Instruction cycle Internal clock SYNC 1 T1 2 IR1 T2 IR2 T3 T1 T2 T3 : Interrupt acceptance timing points IR1 IR2 : Timings points at which the interrupt request bit is set to "1". Note : Period 2 indicates the last cycle during one instruction cycle. (1) The interrupt request bit for an interrupt request generated during period 1 is set to "1" at timing point IR1. (2) The interrupt request bit for an interrupt request generated during period 2 is set to "1" at timing point IR1 or IR2. The timing point at which the bit is set to "1" varies depending on conditions. When two or more interrupt requests are generated during the period 2, each request bit may be set to "1" at timing point IR1 or IR2 separately. Fig. 20 Timing of interrupt request generation, interrupt request bit, and interrupt acceptance Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 28 of 131 38D2 Group * Key Input Interrupt (Key-on Wake-Up) A key input interrupt request is generated by detecting the falling edge from any pin of ports P00-P03, P54-P57 that have been set to input mode. In other words, it is generated when AND of input level goes from "1" to "0". An example of using a key input interrupt is shown in Figure 21, where an interrupt request is generated by pressing one of the keys consisted as an active-low key matrix which inputs to ports P54-P57. Port PXx "L" level output Port P03 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P03 latch Segment output disable register 0 Bit 3 = "1" Key input interrupt request P03 output Segment output disable register 0 Bit 2 = "1" Port P02 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P02 latch P02 output Port P01 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P01 latch Segment output disable register 0 Bit 1 = "1" Port P0 Input reading circuit P01 output Segment output disable register 0 Bit 0 = "1" Port P00 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P00 latch P00 output P57 input P56 input P55 input P54 input Port P57 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P57 latch Port P56 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P56 latch Port P55 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P55 latch Port P5 Input reading circuit Port P54 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P54 latch PULL register Bit 5 = "1" P-channel transistor for pull-up CMOS output buffer Fig. 21 Connection example when using key input interrupt Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 29 of 131 38D2 Group A key input interrupt is controlled by the key input control register and port direction registers. When the key input interrupt is enabled, set "1" to the key input control register. A key input of any pin of ports P00-P03, P54-P57 that have been set to input mode is accepted. b7 b0 Key input control register (KIC : address 0FF716) P54 key input control bit P55 key input control bit P56 key input control bit P57 key input control bit P00 key input control bit P01 key input control bit P02 key input control bit P03 key input control bit 0 : Key input interrupt disabled 1 : Key input interrupt enabled Fig. 22 Structure of key input control register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 30 of 131 38D2 Group TIMERS 8-Bit Timer The 38D2 Group has four built-in 8-bit timers: timer 1, timer 2, timer 3, and timer 4. SOURCE (Note) Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 Frequency divider Clock for timer 3 Clock for timer 4 Clock for timer 1 Clock for timer 2 8 Each timer has the 8-bit timer latch. All timers are downcounters. When the timer reaches "0016", the contents of the timer latch is reloaded into the timer with the next count pulse. In this mode, the interrupt request bit corresponding to that timer is set to "1". The count can be stopped by setting the stop bit of each timer to "1". Frequency division selection bits (2 bits for each timer) Data bus XCIN Timer 1 count source selection "00" bits "01" Clock for timer 1 Timer 1 latch (8) Timer 1 (8) "10" Timer Y output Timer 1 interrupt request Timer 1 count stop bit The following values can be selected the clock for timer; 1/1,1/2,1/16,1/256 Timer 2 count source selection bits "00" "01" Clock for timer 2 P36/T2OUT/CKOUT P36 direction register Timer 2 latch (8) Timer 2 (8) "10" Timer 2 write control bit Timer 2 interrupt request Timer 2 count stop bit P36 clock output System clock Timer 2 output selection bit control bit "1" S "0" Q T 1/2 "1" Q "0" T2OUT output P36 edge switch bit latch Timer 2 output selection bit Timer 3 count source selection bit "1" Clock for timer 3 Timer 3 operating mode selection bit P52/PWM0/ T3OUT Timer 3 latch (8) Timer 3 (8) Timer 3 write control bit Timer 3 interrupt request Timer 3 count stop bit "0" 10 bit PWM0 circuit "1" Timer 3 output selection bit PWM01 register (2) "0" "0" S Q P52 direction P52 T "1" register latch Q 1/2 Timer 3 output selection bit T3OUT output edge switch bit "01" "10" Clock for timer 4 Timer 4 operating mode selection bit P53/PWM1/ T4OUT "1" 10 bit PWM1 circuit "00" f(XIN) Timer 4 output selection bit Timer 4 count source selection bits Timer 4 latch (8) Timer 4 (8) "11" Timer 4 write control bit Timer 4 interrupt request Timer 4 count stop bit PWM01 register (2) "0" "0" S Q P53 P53 direction T "1" latch register 1/2 Q T4OUT output Timer 4 output selection bit edge switch bit Fig. 23 Timer 1-4 block diagram Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 31 of 131 SOURCE: represents the oscillation frequency of XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and sub-clock in the low-speed mode. 38D2 Group * Frequency Divider For Timer Timer 1, timer 2, timer 3 and timer 4 have the frequency divider for the count source. The count source of the frequency divider is switched to XIN, XCIN, or the on-chip oscillator OCO divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode by the CPU mode register. The frequency divider is controlled by each timer division ratio selection bit. The division ratio can be selected from as follows; 1/1, 1/2, 1/16, 1/256 of f(XIN), f(XCIN) or f(OCO)/4. Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, X IN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. * Timer 1, Timer 2 The count source for timer 1 and timer 2 can be set using the timer 12 mode register. X CIN may be selected as the count source. If XCIN is selected, count operation is possible regardless of whether or not the XIN input oscillator or the on-chip oscillator is operating. In addition, the timer 12 mode register can be used to output from the P36/T2OUT pin a signal to invert the polarity every time timer 2 underflows. At reset, all bits of the timer 12 mode register are set to "0", timer 1 is set to "FF16", and timer 2 is set to "0116". When executing the STP instruction, previously set the wait time at return. * Timer 3, Timer 4 The count sources of timer 3 and timer 4 can be selected by setting the timer 34 mode register. Also, by the timer 34 mode register, each time timer 3 or timer 4 underflows, the signal of which polarity is inverted can be output from P52/T3OUT pin or P53/T4OUT pin. * Timer 3 PWM0 Mode, Timer 4 PWM1 Mode A PWM rectangular waveform corresponding to the 10-bit accuracy can be output from the P52/PWM0 pin and P53/PWM1 pin by setting the timer 34 mode register and PWM01 register (refer to Figure 24). One output pulse is the short interval. Four output pulses are the long interval. The "n" is the value set in the timer 3 (address 002216) or the timer 4 (address 002316). The "ts" is one period of timer 3 or timer 4 count source. "H" width of the short interval is obtained by n x ts. However, in the long interval, "H" width of output pulse is extended for ts which is set by the PWM01 register (address 002416). (1) Timer 3 PWM0 Mode, Timer 4 PWM1 Mode * When PWM output is suspended after starting PWM output, depending on the level of the output pulse at that time to resume an output, the delay of the one section of the short interval may be needed. Stop at "H": No output delay Stop at "L": Output is delayed time of 256 x ts * In the PWM mode, the follows are performed every cycle of the long interval (4 x 256 x ts). * Generation of timer 3, timer 4 interrupt requests * Update of timer 3, timer 4 (2) Write to Timer 2, Timer 3, Timer 4 When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. In this time, counting is stopped during writing to the reload latch. Output waveform of timer 3 PWM0 or timer 4 PWM1 Long interval 4 x 256 x ts Short interval 256 x ts PWM01 register = "002" PWM01 register = "012" PWM01 register = "102" PWM01 register = "112" Short interval 256 x ts Short interval 256 x ts Short interval 256 x ts n x ts n x ts n x ts n x ts (n+1) x ts n x ts n x ts n x ts (n+1) x ts n x ts (n+1) x ts n x ts (n+1) x ts (n+1) x ts (n+1) x ts n x ts Interrupt request Interrupt request n: Setting value of timer 3 or timer 4 ts: One period of timer 3 count source or timer 4 count source PWM01 register (address 002416) : 2-bit value corresponding to PWM0 (bits 0, 1) or PWM1 (bits 2, 3) Fig. 24 Waveform of PWM0 and PWM1 Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 32 of 131 38D2 Group b7 b7 b0 b0 Timer 12 mode register (T12M: address 002516) PWM01 register (PWM01: address 002416) Timer 1 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop PWM0 set bits b1b0 0 0 1 1 Timer 2 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop PWM1 set bits Timer 1 count source selection bits b3b2 b3b2 0 0 1 1 0 : No extended 1 : Extended once in four periods 0 : Extended twice in four periods 1 : Extended three times in four periods 0 0 1 1 0 : Frequency divider for timer 1 1 : f(XCIN) 0 : Underflow of timer Y 1 : Not available 0 : No extended 1 : Extended once in four periods 0 : Extended twice in four periods 1 : Extended three times in four periods Not used (returns "0" when read) Timer 2 count source selection bits b5b4 0 0 1 1 0 : Underflow of timer 1 1 : f(X CIN) 0 : Frequency divider for timer 2 1 : Not available Timer 2 output selection bit (P3 6) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 2 output T2OUT output edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output b7 b7 b0 Timer 1 frequency division selection bits b1b0 Timer 4 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop (1) 0 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 0 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 1 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Timer 2 frequency division selection bits Timer 3 count source selection bit 0 : Frequency divider for timer 3 1 : Underflow of Timer 2 b3b2 0 0 1 1 Timer 4 count source selection bits b4b3 0 0 : Frequency divider for timer 4 0 1 : Underflow of Timer 3 1 0 : Underflow of Timer 2 1 1 : f(XIN) Timer 3 operating mode selection bit 0 : Timer mode 1 : PWM mode 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Timer 3 frequency division selection bits b5b4 0 0 1 1 Timer 4 operating mode selection bit 0 : Timer mode 1 : PWM mode 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Timer 4 frequency division selection bits b7b6 0 0 1 1 Not used (returns "0" when read) b7 b0 Timer 1234 frequency division selection register (PRE1234: address 002816) Timer 34 mode register (T34M: address 002616) Timer 3 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE b0 Timer 1234 mode register (T1234M: address 002716) T3OUT output edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output T4OUT output edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output Note1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode Timer 3 output selection bit (P5 2) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 3 output Timer 4 output selection bit (P5 3) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 4 output Timer 2 write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer 3 write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer 4 write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Not used (returns "0" when read) Fig. 25 Structure of timer 1 to timer 4 related registers Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 33 of 131 38D2 Group 16-bit Timer Read and write operation on 16-bit timer must be performed for both high and low-order bytes. When reading a 16-bit timer, read the high-order byte first. When writing to a 16-bit timer, write the low-order byte first. The 16-bit timer cannot perform the correct operation when reading during the write operation, or when writing during the read operation. XIN SOURCE 2 Frequency divider Timer X frequency division selection bits Noise filter sampling Trigger for IGBT control bit clock selection bit "1" 1/4 "1" x2 Frequency divider 1/2 "0" "0" Delay time selection bits 0 s Noise filter (4 times same levels judgment) Edge selection INT0 "00" 4/f(XIN) "01" Delay circuit 8/f(XIN) "10" Data bus INT0 interrupt request Trigger for IGBT control bit Timer X operating mode bits "1" "010" Delay circuit 1/2 16/f(XIN) "11" "0" Clock for timer X "0" Count source selection bit XcIN "1" Timer X operating mode bits Timer X write control bit "000" D Q Data for control of event counter window Timer 1 interrupt "001" Timer X count "010" stop bit "011" "101" Latch "00" Timer X (low-order) latch (8) Timer X (high-order) latch (8) Extend latch (2) CNTR0 Timer X (low-order)(8) Both edges detection "000" "001" "011" "100" "101" "01" Timer X (high-order)(8) Extend counter (2) "10" "11" CNTR0 active edge switch bits CNTR0 interrupt request Pulse width measurement mode Timer X output Timer X operating "010" mode bits control bit 1 INT1 INT2 Edge selection * Timer X output control bit 2 Edge detection Compare register 1 (low-order)(8) Compare register 1 (high-order)(8) Compare register 2 (low-order)(8) Compare register 2 (high-order)(8) Edge selection * Compare register 3 (low-order)(8) Compare register 3 (high-order)(8) R Q T Q Pulse output mode "0" P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P35 direction register P35 latch "1" Timer X output 1 edge switch bit "0" P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/(LED7) P37 direction register P37 latch "1" Timer X output 2 edge switch bit Timer X output 2 selection bit SOURCE : represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode. Fig. 26 Timer X block diagram Page 34 of 131 Q S T Q IGBT output mode PWM mode Timer X output 1 selection bit Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Timer X interrupt request "100" R Q Q T Equal 38D2 Group * Frequency Divider For Timer Each timer X and timer Y have the frequency dividers for the count source. The count source of the frequency divider is switched to XIN, XCIN, or the on-chip oscillator OCO divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode by the CPU mode register. The division ratio of each timer can be controlled by each timer division ratio selection bit. The division ratio can be selected from as follows; 1/1, 1/2, 1/16, 1/256 of f(XIN), f(XCIN) or f(OCO)/4. Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, X IN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. * Timer X The count source for timer X can be set using the timer X mode register. XCIN may be selected as the count source. If XCIN is selected, count operation is possible regardless of whether or not the XIN input oscillator or the on-chip oscillator is operating. The timer X operates as down-count. When the timer contents reach "000016", an underflow occurs at the next count pulse and the timer latch contents are reloaded. After that, the timer continues countdown. When the timer underflows, the interrupt request bit corresponding to the timer X is set to "1". Six operating modes can be selected for timer X by the timer X mode register and timer X control register. (1) Timer Mode The count source can be selected by setting the timer X mode register. In this mode, timer X operates as the 18-bit counter by setting the timer X register (extension). (2) Pulse Output Mode Pulses of which polarity is inverted each time the timer underflows are output from the TXOUT1 pin. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the timer mode. When using this mode, set the port sharing the TXOUT1 pin to output mode. (3) IGBT Output Mode After dummy output from the TXOUT1 pin, count starts with the INT0 pin input as a trigger. In the case that the timer X output 1 active edge switch bit is "0", when the trigger is detected or the timer X underflows, "H" is output from the TXOUT1 pin. And then, when the count value corresponds with the compare register 1 value, the TXOUT1 output becomes "L". After noise is cleared by noise filters, judging continuous 4-time same levels with sampling clocks to be signals, the INT0 signal can use 4 types of delay time by a delay circuit. When using this mode, set the port sharing the INT0 pin to input mode and set the port sharing the pin used as TXOUT1 or TXOUT2 function to output mode. When the timer X output control bit 1 or 2 of the timer X control register is set to "1", the timer X count stop bit is fixed to "1" forcibly by the interrupt signal of INT1 or INT2. And then, the TXOUT1 output and TXOUT2 output can be set to "L" forcibly at the same time that the timer X stops counting. Do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension) when using the IGBT output mode. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 35 of 131 (4) PWM Mode IGBT dummy output, an external trigger with the INT0 pin and output control with pins INT1 and INT2 are not used. Except for those, this mode operates just as in the IGBT output mode. The period of PWM waveform is specified by the timer X set value. In the case that the timer X output 1 active edge switch bit is "0", the "H" interval is specified by the compare register 1 set value. In the case that the timer X output 2 active edge switch bit is "0", the "H" interval is specified by the compare registers 2 and 3 set values. When using this mode, set the port sharing the pin used as TXOUT1 or TXOUT2 function to output mode. Do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension) when using the PWM mode. (5) Event Counter Mode The timer counts signals input through the CNTR0 pin. In this mode, timer X operates as the 18-bit counter by setting the timer X register (extension). When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR0 pin to input mode. In this mode, the window control can be performed by the timer 1 underflow. When the bit 5 (data for control of event counter window) of the timer X mode register is set to "1", counting is stopped at the next timer 1 underflow. When the bit is set to "0", counting is restarted at the next timer 1 underflow. (6) Pulse Width Measurement Mode In this mode, the count source is the output of frequency divider for timer. In this mode, timer X operates as the 18-bit counter by setting the timer X register (extension). When the bit 6 of the CNTR 0 active edge switch bits is "0", counting is executed during the "H" interval of CNTR0 pin input. When the bit is "1", counting is executed during the "L" interval of CNTR0 pin input. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR0 pin to input mode. Also, set to enable ("0") the data for control of event counter window (bit 5 of timer X mode register (address 002D16)). 38D2 Group ts Timer X count source Timer X PWM mode IGBT output mode External trigger (INT0 source) is generated. INT1 or INT2 source is generated. Level is "H" only IGBT output mode. TXOUT1 output (TXCON1 bit 5 = "0") m x ts TXOUT2 output (TXCON2 bit 1 = "0") Level is forcibly "L" only IGBT output mode. q x ts p x ts (n+1) x ts n : Timer X setting value m: Compare register 1 setting value p : Compare register 2 setting value q : Compare register 3 setting value ts: One period of timer X count source The following PWM waveform is output; Duty of TXOUT1 output :{(n+1)-m}/(n+1), Duty of TXOUT2 output :(p-q)/(n+1), Period :(n+1) x ts Fig. 27 Waveform of PWM/IGBT (1) Write Order to Timer X * In the timer mode, pulse output mode, event counter mode and pulse width measurement mode, write to the following registers in the order as shown below; the timer X register (extension), the timer X register (low-order), the timer X register (high-order). Do not write to only one of them. When the above mode is set and timer X operates as the 16-bit counter, if the timer X register (extension) is never set after reset is released, setting the timer X register (extension) is not required. In this case, write the timer X register (low-order) first and the timer X register (high-order). However, once writing to the timer X register (extension) is executed, note that the value is retained to the reload latch. * Write to the timer X register by the 16-bit unit. Do not read the timer X register while write operation is performed. If the write operation is not completed, normal operation will not be performed. * In the IGBT output and PWM modes, do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension). Also, when "1" is already written to the timer X register, be sure to write "0" to the register before using. Write to the following registers in the order as shown below; the compare registers 1, 2, 3 (high- and low-order), the timer X register (extension), the timer X register (low-order), the timer X register (high-order). It is possible to use whichever order to write to the compare registers 1, 2, 3 (high- and low-order). However, write both the compare registers 1, 2, 3 and the timer X register at the same time. For the compare registers, set a value less than the setting value in the timer X register. Also, do not set "0016". Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 36 of 131 (2) Read Order to Timer X * In all modes, read the following registers in the order as shown below; the timer X register (extension), the timer X register (high-order), the timer X register (low-order). When reading the timer X register (extension) is not required, read the timer X register (high-order) first and the timer X register (low-order). Read order to the compare registers 1, 2, 3 is not specified. * Read from the timer X register by the 16-bit unit. Do not write to the timer X register while read operation is performed. If the read operation is not completed, normal operation will not be performed. (3) Write to Timer X * Which write control can be selected by the timer X write control bit (b3) of the timer X mode register (address 2D16), writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only to the latch. When writing a value to the timer X address to write to the latch only, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After reset release, when writing a value to the timer X address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are written at the same time. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the highorder reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. In this time, counting is stopped during writing to the high-order reload latch. * Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, X IN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. 38D2 Group (4) Set of Timer X Mode Register Set the write control bit of the timer X mode register to "1" (write to the latch only) when setting the IGBT output and PWM modes. Output waveform simultaneously reflects the contents of both registers at the next underflow after writing to the timer X register (high-order). (5) Output Control Function of Timer X * When using the output control function (INT1 and INT2) in the IGBT output mode, set the levels of INT1 and INT2 to "H" in the falling edge active or to "L" in the rising edge active before switching to the IGBT output mode. (7) When Timer X Pulse Width Measurement Mode Used When timer X pulse width measurement mode is used, enable the event counter wind control data (bit 5 of timer X mode register (address 002D16)) by setting to "0". If the event counter window control data (bit 5 of timer X mode r egister (add ress 002 D 1 6 )) is set to "1" (disabled) to enable/disable the CNTR0 input, the input is not accepted after the timer 1 underflow. (6) Switch of CNTR0 Active Edge * When the CNTR0 active edge switch bits are set, at the same time, the interrupt active edge is also affected. When the pulse width is measured, set the bit 7 of the CNTR0 active edge switch bits to "0". b7 b7 b0 Timer X mode register (TXM: address 002D 16) Timer X operating mode bits b2b1b0 0 0 0 : Timer mode 0 0 1 : Pulse output mode 0 1 0 : IGBT output mode 0 1 1 : PWM mode 1 0 0 : Event counter mode 1 0 1 : Pulse width measurement mode 1 1 0 : Not available 1 1 1 : Not available Timer X write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer X count source selection bit 0 : Frequency divider output 1 : f(XCIN) Data for control of event counter window 0 : Event count enabled 1 : Event count disabled Timer X count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop Timer X output 1 selection bit (P3 5) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer X output 1 b7 b0 Timer X control register 2 (TXCON2: address 002F16) Timer X output 2 control bit (P3 7) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer X output 2 Timer X output 2 active edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output Timer X dividing frequency selection bits b3b2 0 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 0 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE (1) 1 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Trigger for IGBT input control bit 0 : Noise filter sampling clock x 1 External trigger delay time x 1 1 : Noise filter sampling clock x 2 External trigger delay time x 1/2 Not used (returns "0" when read) Fig. 28 Structure of timer X related registers Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 37 of 131 b0 Timer X control register 1 (TXCON1: address 002E 16) Noise filter sampling clock selection bit 0 : f(XIN)/2 1 : f(XIN)/4 External trigger delay time selection bits b2b1 0 0 : Not delayed 0 1 : (4/f(XIN)) s 1 0 : (8/f(XIN)) s 1 1 : (16/f(XIN)) s Timer X output control bit 1 (P5 1) 0 : Not used INT1 interrupt signal 1 : INT1 interrupt signal used Timer X output control bit 2 (P3 4) 0 : Not used INT2 interrupt signal 1 : INT2 interrupt signal used Timer X output 1 active edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output CNTR0 active edge switch bits b7b6 0 0 : Count at rising edge in event counter mode Falling edge active for CNTR 0 interrupt Measure "H" pulse width in pulse width measurement mode 0 1 : Count at falling edge in event counter mode Rising edge active for CNTR 0 interrupt Measure "L" pulse width in pulse width measurement mode 1 0 : Count at both edges in event counter mode 1 1 : Both edges active for CNTR 0 interrupt Note1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode 38D2 Group Data bus SOURCE 2 Frequency divider Timer Y operating mode bits Timer Y dividing frequency selection bit "00", "01", "10" "0" XcIN "1" Rising edge detection Count source selection bit Falling edge detection Timer Y (low-order)(8) "10" Q D "00" Latch P47 data for real time port P47/RTP1/AN7 Real time port control bits "00" Timer Y mode register write signal Real time port control bits P46 data for real time port Q D P46/RTP0/AN6 "00" Timer Y interrupt request "11" P47 latch Real time port control bits "11" Timer Y (high-order)(8) Timer Y operating mode bits Real time port control bits "11" P46 direction register "11" Period measurement mode Timer Y (low-order) latch (8) Timer Y (high-order) latch (8) "00", "01", "11" "0" CNTR1 P47 direction register CNTR1 interrupt request Timer Y write control bit Timer Y count stop bit CNTR1 active edge switch bit "1" Pulse width HL continuous measurement mode Latch "00" Timer Y mode register write signal "11" P46 latch Note: In frequency/2, frequency/4, or frequency/8 mode, SOURCE is the XIN input. In on-chip oscillator mode, SOURCE is the on-chip oscillator frequency divided by 4. In low-speed mode, SOURCE is the sub-clock frequency. Fig. 29 Block diagram of timer Y * Timer Y Timer Y is a 16-bit timer. The timer Y count source can be selected by setting the timer Y mode register. X CIN can be selected as the count source. When XCIN is selected as the count source, counting can be performed regardless of XIN oscillation or on-chip oscillator oscillation. Four operating modes can be selected for timer Y by the timer Y mode register. Also, the real time port can be controlled. (1) Timer Mode The timer Y count source can be selected by setting the timer Y mode register. (2) Period Measurement Mode The interrupt request is generated at rising or falling edge of CNTR1 pin input signal. Simultaneously, the value in timer Y latch is reloaded in timer Y and timer Y continues counting. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the timer mode. The timer value just before the reloading at rising or falling of CNTR1 pin input is retained until the timer Y is read once after the reload. The rising or falling timing of CNTR1 pin input is found by CNTR1 interrupt. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR1 pin to input mode. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 38 of 131 (3) Event Counter Mode The timer counts signals input through the CNTR1 pin. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the timer mode. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR1 pin to input mode. (4) Pulse Width HL Continuously Measurement Mode The interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of CNTR1 pin input signal. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the period measurement mode. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR1 pin to input mode. (5) Real Time Port Control When the real time port function is valid, data for the real time port is output from ports P4 6 and P4 7 each time the timer Y underflows. (However, if the real time port control bits are changed from "002" to "112" after both data for real time ports are set, data are output independent of the timer Y operation.) When either or both data for real time ports are changed while the real time port function is valid, the changed data is output at the next underflow of timer Y. When switching the setting of the real time port control bits between valid and invalid, write to the timer Y mode register in byte units with the LDM or STA instruction so that both bits are switched at the same time. Also, before using this function, set the P46 and P47 port direction registers to output. 38D2 Group * CNTR1 Interrupt Active Edge Selection CNTR1 interrupt active edge depends on the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. However, in pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, CNTR1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of CNTR 1 pin input signal regardless of the setting of CNTR1 active edge switch bit. * This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, X IN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. * Timer Y Read/Write Control * When reading from/writing to timer Y, read from/write to both the high-order and low-order bytes of timer Y. When the value is read, read the high-order bytes first and the low-order bytes next. When the value is written, write the low-order bytes first and the highorder bytes next. Write to or read from the timer X register in 16-bit units. If reading from the timer Y register during write operation or writing to it during read operation is performed, normal operation will not be performed. * Which write control can be selected by the timer Y write control bit (b0) of the timer Y control register (address 0039 16), writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only to the latch. When writing a value to the timer Y address to write to the latch only, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After reset release, when writing a value to the timer Y address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are set to write at the same time. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the highorder reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. In this time, counting is stopped during writing to the high-order reload latch. b7 b7 b0 Timer Y mode register (TYM: address 003816) Real time port control bits (P4 6, P47 ) b1 b0 0 0 : Real time port function invalid 0 1 : Do not set 1 0 : Do not set 1 1 : Real time port function valid P46 data for real time port P47 data for real time port Timer Y operating mode bits b5 b4 0 0 : Timer mode 0 1 : Period measurement mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 1 1 : Pulse width HL continuous measurement mode CNTR1 active edge switch bit 0 : Count at rising edge in event counter mode Measure falling period in period measurement mode Falling edge active for CNTR 1 interrupt 1 : Count at falling edge in event counter mode Measure rising period in period measurement mode Rising edge active for CNTR 1 interrupt Timer Y count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop Fig. 30 Structure of timer Y related registers Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 39 of 131 b0 Timer Y control register (TYCON: address 003916) Timer Y write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer Y count source selection bit 0 : Frequency divider output 1 : f(XCIN) Timer Y frequency division selection bits b3 b2 0 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 0 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 1 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Not used (returns "0" when read) SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode. 38D2 Group SERIAL INTERFACE * SERIAL I/O The 38D2 Group has two 8-bit serial I/O (serial I/O1 and serial I/O2). Serial I/O can be used as either clock synchronous or asynchronous (UART) serial I/O. A dedicated timer is also provided for baud rate generation. (1) Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode Clock synchronous serial I/O mode can be selected by setting the serial I/O mode selection bit of the serial I/O control register to "1". For clock synchronous serial I/O, the transmitter and the receiver must use the same clock. If an internal clock is used, transfer is started by a write signal to the TB/RB. Data bus Address 001816 [Address 001D16] Address 001A16 [Address 001F16] Receive buffer full flag (RBF) Serial I/O control register Receive buffer register P54/RXD1 [P33/RXD2] Receive interrupt request (RI) Receive shift register Shift clock Clock control circuit P56/SCLK1 [P31/SCLK2] Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1) Baud rate generator 1/4 Address 001C16 [Address 0FF216] BRG count source selection bit SOURCE 1/4 P57/SRDY1 [P30/SRDY2] F/F Falling-edge detector Clock control circuit Transmit shift completion flag (TSC) Shift clock P55/TXD1 [P32/TXD2] Transmit shift register Transmit interrupt source selection bit Transmit interrupt request (TI) Transmit buffer register Address 001816 [Address 001D16] Data bus [ ] : For Serial I/O2 Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) Address 001916 [Address 001E16] Serial I/O status register SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode. Fig. 31 Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O Transfer shift clock (1/2 to 1/2048 of the internal clock, or an external clock) Serial output TxD D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Serial input RxD D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Receive enable signal SRDY Write pulse to receive/transmit buffer register TBE = 0 TBE = 1 TSC = 0 RBF = 1 TSC = 1 Overrun error (OE) detection Notes 1: As the transmit interrupt (TI) source, which can be selected, either when the transmit buffer has emptied (TBE = 1) or after the transmit shift operation has ended (TSC = 1), by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O control register. 2: If data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=0, the transmit clock is generated continuously and serial data is output continuously from the TxD pin. 3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the receive buffer full flag (RBF) becomes "1" . Fig. 32 Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O function Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 40 of 131 38D2 Group (2) Asynchronous Serial I/O (UART) Mode Clock asynchronous serial I/O mode (UART) can be selected by setting the serial I/O mode selection bit of the serial I/O control register to "0". Eight serial data transfer formats can be selected, and the transfer formats used by a transmitter and receiver must be identical. The transmit and receive shift registers each have a buffer, but the two buffers have the same address in memory. Since the shift register cannot be written to or read from directly, transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register, and receive data is read from the receive buffer register. The transmit buffer register can also hold the next data to be transmitted, and the receive buffer register can hold a character while the next character is being received. Data bus Address 001816 [Address 001D16] Serial I/O control register Address 001A16 [Address 001F16] OE Receive buffer register Receive buffer full flag (RBF) Receive interrupt request (RI) Character length selection bit 7 bits ST detector Receive shift register P54/RXD1 [P33/RXD2] 1/16 8 bits PE FE UART control register SP detector Address 001B16 [Address 0FE116] Clock control circuit Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit P56/SCLK1 [P31/SCLK2] SOURCE BRG count source selection bit Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1) Baud rate generator Address 001C16 [Address 0FE216] 1/4 ST/SP/PA generator Transmit shift completion flag (TSC) 1/16 P55/TXD1 [P32/TXD2] Transmit interrupt source selection bit Transmit interrupt request (TI) Transmit shift register Character length selection bit Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) Address 001916 [Address 001E16] Transmit buffer register Address 001816 [Address 001D16] Data bus Serial I/O status register [ ] : For Serial I/O2 SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode. Fig. 33 Block diagram of UART serial I/O Transmit or receive clock Transmit buffer register write signal TBE=0 TSC=0 TBE=1 TBE=0 TSC=1 TBE=1 Serial output TxD ST D0 D1 SP ST D0 SP D1 Generated at 2nd bit in 2-stop-bit mode 1 start bit 7 or 8 data bit 1 or 0 parity bit 1 or 2 stop bit (s) Receive buffer register read signal RBF=0 RBF=1 RBF=1 Serial input RxD ST D0 D1 SP ST D0 D1 Notes 1: Error flag detection occurs at the same time that the RBF flag becomes "1" (at 1st stop bit, during reception). 2: As the transmit interrupt (TI), when either the TBE or TSC flag becomes "1", can be selected to occur depending on the setting of the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O control register. 3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the RBF flag becomes "1". 4: After data is written to the transmit buffer when TSC flag = "1", 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the data shift cycle is necessary until changing to TSC flag = "0". Fig. 34 Operation of UART serial I/O function Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 41 of 131 SP 38D2 Group [Transmit Buffer Register/Receive Buffer Register (TB1, RB1/TB2, RB2)] The transmit buffer register and the receive buffer register are located at the same address. The transmit buffer is write-only and the receive buffer is read-only. If a character bit length is 7 bits, the MSB of data stored in the receive buffer is "0". [Serial I/O Status Register (SIO1STS, SIO2STS)] The read-only serial I/O status register consists of seven flags (bits 0 to 6) which indicate the operating status of the serial I/O function and various errors. Three of the flags (bits 4 to 6) are valid only in UART mode. The receive buffer full flag (bit 1) is set to "0" when the receive buffer register is read. If there is an error, it is detected at the same time that data is transferred from the receive shift register to the receive buffer register, and the receive buffer full flag is set. A write to the serial I/O status register sets all the error flags OE, PE, FE, and SE (bit 3 to bit 6, respectively) to "0". Writing "0" to the serial I/O enable bit SIOE (bit 7 of the serial I/O control register) also sets all the status flags to "0", including the error flags. All bits of the serial I/O status register are set to "0" at reset, but if the transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O control register has been set to "1", the transmit shift completion flag (bit 2) and the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) become "1". [Serial I/O Control Register (SIO1CON, SIO2CON)] The serial I/O control register consists of eight control bits for the serial I/O function. [UART Control Register (UART1CON, UART2CON)] The UART control register consists of four control bits (bits 0 to 3) which are valid when asynchronous serial I/O is selected and set the data format of the data transfer and one bit (bit 4) which is always valid and sets the output structure of the P5 5 /T X D 1 [P32/TxD2] pin. [Baud Rate Generator (BRG1, BRG2)] The baud rate generator determines the baud rate for serial transfer. The baud rate generator divides the frequency of the count source by 1/(n + 1), where n is the value written to the baud rate generator. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 42 of 131 When setting transmit enable bit of serial I/O to "1", the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit is automatically set to "1". When not requiring the interrupt occurrence synchronous with the transmission enabled, take the following sequence. (1) Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit to "0" (disabled). (2) Set the transmit enable bit to "1". (3) Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit to "0" after 1 or more instructions have been executed. (4) Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled). 38D2 Group b7 b0 Serial I/O status register (SIO1STS : address 001916) [SIO2STS : address 001E16] b7 b0 Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) 0: Buffer full 1: Buffer empty Transmit shift completion flag (TSC) 0: Transmit shift in progress 1: Transmit shift completed Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit (SCS) 0: BRG output divided by 4 when clock synchronous serial I/O is selected. BRG output divided by 16 when UART is selected. 1: External clock input when clock synchronous serial I/O is selected. External clock input divided by 16 when UART is selected. Overrun error flag (OE) 0: No error 1: Overrun error SRDY output enable bit (SRDY) 0: P57 [P30] pin operates as ordinary I/O pin 1: P57 [P30] pin operates as SRDY output pin Parity error flag (PE) 0: No error 1: Parity error Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) 0: Interrupt when transmit buffer has emptied 1: Interrupt when transmit shift operation is completed Framing error flag (FE) 0: No error 1: Framing error Transmit enable bit (TE) 0: Transmit disabled 1: Transmit enabled Summing error flag (SE) 0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=0 1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=1 Receive enable bit (RE) 0: Receive disabled 1: Receive enabled Not used (returns "1" when read) Serial I/O mode selection bit (SIOM) 0: Clock asynchronous (UART) serial I/O 1: Clock synchronous serial I/O Receive buffer full flag (RBF) 0: Buffer empty 1: Buffer full b7 b0 Serial I/O control register (SIO1CON : address 001A16) [SIO2CON : address 001F16] BRG count source selection bit (CSS) 0: SOURCE 1: SOURCE/4 Serial I/O enable bit (SIOE) 0: Serial I/O disabled (pins P54 [P30] to P57 [P33] operate as ordinary I/O pins) 1: Serial I/O enabled (pins P54 [P30] to P57 [P33] operate as serial I/O pins) UART control register (UART1CON : address 001B16) [UART2CON : address 0FF116] Character length selection bit (CHAS) 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits Parity enable bit (PARE) 0: Parity checking disabled 1: Parity checking enabled Parity selection bit (PARS) 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity ( ) : For Serial I/O1 [ ] : For Serial I/O2 SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode. Stop bit length selection bit (STPS) 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits P55/TXD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (POFF) 0: CMOS output (in output mode) 1: N-channel open drain output (in output mode) Not used (return "1" when read) Fig. 35 Structure of serial I/O related registers Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 43 of 131 38D2 Group A/D CONVERTER The 38D2 Group has a 10-bit A/D converter. The A/D converter performs successive approximation conversion. The 38D2 Group has the ADKEY function which perform A/D conversion of the "L" level analog input from the ADKEY pin automatically. [AD Conversion Register (ADL, ADH)] One of these registers is a high-order register, and the other is a low-order register. The high-order 8 bits of a conversion result is stored in the AD conversion register (high-order) (address 001716), and the low-order 2 bits of the same result are stored in bit 7 and bit 6 of the AD conversion register (low-order) (address 001616). During A/D conversion, do not read these registers. Also, the connection between the resistor ladder and reference voltage input pin (VREF) can be controlled by the VREF input switch bit (bit 0 of address 001616). When "1" is written to this bit, the resistor ladder is always connected to VREF. When "0" is written to this bit, the resistor ladder is disconnected from VREF except during the A/D conversion. [AD Control Register (ADCON)] This register controls A/D converter. Bits 2 to 0 are analog input pin selection bits. Bit 3 is an AD conversion completion bit and "0" during A/D conversion. This bit is set to "1" upon completion of A/D conversion. A/D conversion is started by setting "0" in this bit. Bit 5 is the ADKEY enable bit. The ADKEY function is enabled by setting "1" to this bit. When this function is valid, the analog input pin selection bits are ignored. Also, when bit 5 is "1", do not set "0" to bit 3 by program. [Channel Selector] The channel selector selects one of the input ports P47/AN7- P40/AN0 and inputs it to the comparator. [Comparator and Control Circuit] The comparator and control circuit compare an analog input voltage with the comparison voltage and store the result in the AD conversion register. When an A/D conversion is completed, the control circuit sets the AD conversion completion bit and the AD conversion interrupt request bit to "1". The comparator is constructed linked to a capacitor. The conversion accuracy may be low because the change is lost if the conversion speed is not enough. Accordingly, set f(X IN ) to at least 500 kHz during A/D conversion in the XIN mode. Also, do not execute the STP and WIT instructions during the A/D conversion. In the low-speed mode and on-chip oscillator mode, there is no limit on the oscillation frequency because the on-chip oscillator is used as the A/D conversion clock. In the low-speed mode, onchip oscillator starts oscillation automatically at the A/D conversion is executed and stops oscillation automatically at the A/D conversion is finished even though it is not oscillating. [Comparison Voltage Generator] The comparison voltage generator divides the voltage between AVSS and VREF, and outputs the divided voltages. Data bus AD control register b7 b0 ADKEY control circuit SOURCE 1/ 2 1/ 8 A/D control circuit Channel selector P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2/ADKEY P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6 P47/AN7 Comparator A/D interrupt request AD conversion register (H) AD conversion register (L) (Address 001616) (Address 001716) Resistor ladder AVSS VREF Note: In frequency/2, frequency/4, or frequency/8 mode, SOURCE is the XIN input. In low-speed mode, or on-chip oscillator mode, SOURCE is the on-chip oscillator frequency divided by 4. Fig. 36 Block diagram of A/D converter Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 44 of 131 38D2 Group b7 b0 AD control register (ADCON: address 001516) Analog input pin selection bits b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 : P40/AN0 1 : P41/AN1 0 : P42/AN2 1 : P43/AN3 0 : P44/AN4 1 : P45/AN5 0 : P46/AN6 1 : P47/AN7 AD conversion completion bit 0 : Conversion in progress 1 : Conversion completed AD conversion clock selection bit 0 : SOURCE/2 (1) 1 : SOURCE/8 ADKEY enable bit (2) 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled 10-bit or 8-bit conversion switch bit 0 : 10-bit AD 1 : 8-bit AD ADKEY selection bit 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid At 10bitAD (Read address 001716 before 001616) AD conversion register high-order (Address 001716) b7 AD conversion register low-order (Address 001616) b7 b0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 (high-order) b0 b1 b0 * (low-order) * VREF input switch bit 0: ON only during A/D conversion 1: ON Note : The bit 5 to bit 1 of address 001616 become "0" at reading. Also, bit 0 is undefined at reading. At 8bitAD (Read only address 001716) b7 (Address 001716) b0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Notes 1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the low-speed and the on-chip oscillator mode 2: When the ADKEY enable bit is "1", the analog input pin selection bits are invalid. Do not execute the A/D conversion by program while the ADKEY is enabled. Bit 0 to bit 2 of ADCON are not changed even when ADKEY is enabled. Fig. 37 Structure of AD control register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 45 of 131 ADKEY function The ADKEY function is used to judge the analog input voltage input from the ADKEY pin. When the A/D converter starts operating after VIL (0.7 x Vcc-0.5) or less is input, the event of analog voltage input can be judged with the A/D conversion interrupt. This function can be used with the STP and WIT state. As for the ADKEY function in 38D2 Group, the A/D conversion of analog input voltage immediately after starting ADKEY function is not performed. Therefore, the A/D conversion result immediately after an ADKEY function is undefined. Accordingly, when the A/D conversion result of the analog input voltage input from the ADKEY pin is required, start the A/D conversion by program after the analog input pin corresponding to ADKEY is selected. * ADKEY Selection When the ADKEY pin is used, set the ADKEY selection bit to "1". The ADKEY selection bit is "0", just after the A/D conversion is started. * ADKEY Enable The ADKEY function is enabled by writing "1" to the ADKEY enable bit. Surely, in order to enable ADKEY function, set "1" to the ADKEY enable bit, after setting the ADKEY selection bit to "1". When the ADKEY enable bit of the AD control register is "1", the analog input pin selection bits become invalid. Please do not write "0" in the AD conversion completion bit by the program during ADKEY enabled state. [ADKEY Control Circuit] In order to obtain a more exact conversion result, by the A/D conversion with ADKEY, execute the following; * set the input to the ADKEY pin into a steep falling waveform, * stabilize the input voltage within 8 clock cycles (1 s at f(XIN) = 8 MHz) after the input voltage is under VIL The threshold voltage with an actual ADKEY pin is the voltage between VIH-VIL. In order not to make ADKEY operation perform superfluously in a noise etc., in the state of the waiting for an input, set the voltage of an ADKEY pin to VIH (0.9VCC) or more. When the following operations are performed, the A/D conversion operation cannot be guaranteed. * When the CPU mode register is operated during A/D conversion operation, * When the AD conversion control register is operated during A/D conversion operation, * When the STP or WIT instruction is executed during A/D conversion operation. 38D2 Group LCD DRIVE CONTROL CIRCUIT The 38D2 Group has the built-in Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) drive control circuit consisting of the following. * LCD display RAM * Segment output disable register * LCD mode register * Selector * Timing controller * Common driver * Segment driver * Bias control circuit A maximum of 24 segment output pins and 4 common output pins can be used. Up to 96 pixels can be controlled for an LCD display. When the LCD enable bit is set to "1" after data is set in the LCD mode register, the segment output disable register, and the LCD display b7 b0 RAM, the LCD drive control circuit starts reading the display data automatically, performs the bias control and the duty ratio control, and displays the data on the LCD panel. . Table 11 Maximum number of display pixels at each duty ratio Duty ratio 2 3 4 b7 Maximum number of display pixels 48 dots or 8 segment LCD 6 digits 72 dots or 8 segment LCD 9 digits 96 dots or 8 segment LCD 12 digits b0 Segment output disable register 0 (1) (SEG0 : address 0FF416) LCD mode register (LM : address 001316) Duty ratio selection bits b1b0 0 0 : Not used 0 1 : 2 (use COM0, COM1) 1 0 : 3 (use COM0-COM2) 1 1 : 4 (use COM0-COM3) Bias control bit 0 : 1/3 bias 1 : 1/2 bias LCD enable bit 0 : LCD OFF 1 : LCD ON LCD drive timing selection bit 0 : Type A 1 : Type B LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits b6b5 0 0 : Clock input 0 1 : 2 division of clock input 1 0 : 4 division of clock input 1 1 : 8 division of clock input LCDCK count source selection bit (Note 3) 0 : f(XCIN)/32 1 : SOURCE/8192 b7 b0 Segment output disable register 1 (1) (SEG1 : address 0FF516) Segment output disable bit 8 0 : Segment output SEG8 1 : Output port P10 Segment output disable bit 9 0 : Segment output SEG9 1 : Output port P11 Segment output disable bit 10 0 : Segment output SEG10 1 : Output port P12 Segment output disable bit 11 0 : Segment output SEG11 1 : Output port P13 Segment output disable bit 12 0 : Segment output SEG12 1 : Output port P14 Segment output disable bit 13 0 : Segment output SEG13 1 : Output port P15 Segment output disable bit 14 0 : Segment output SEG14 1 : Output port P16 Segment output disable bit 15 0 : Segment output SEG15 1 : Output port P17 b7 Segment output disable bit 0 0 : Segment output SEG0 1 : Output port P00 Segment output disable bit 1 0 : Segment output SEG1 1 : Output port P01 Segment output disable bit 2 0 : Segment output SEG2 1 : Output port P02 Segment output disable bit 3 0 : Segment output SEG3 1 : Output port P03 Segment output disable bit 4 0 : Segment output SEG4 1 : Output port P04 Segment output disable bit 5 0 : Segment output SEG5 1 : Output port P05 Segment output disable bit 6 0 : Segment output SEG6 1 : Output port P06 Segment output disable bit 7 0 : Segment output SEG7 1 : Output port P07 b0 Segment output disable register 2 (1) (SEG2 : address 0FE616) Segment output disable bit 16 0 : Segment output SEG16 1 : Output port P20 Segment output disable bit 17 0 : Segment output SEG17 1 : Output port P21 Segment output disable bit 18 0 : Segment output SEG18 1 : Output port P22 Segment output disable bit 19 0 : Segment output SEG19 1 : Output port P23 Segment output disable bit 20 0 : Segment output SEG20 1 : Output port P24 Segment output disable bit 21 0 : Segment output SEG21 1 : Output port P25 Segment output disable bit 22 0 : Segment output SEG22 1 : Output port P26 Segment output disable bit 23 0 : Segment output SEG23 1 : Output port P27 Notes 1: Only pins set to output ports by the direction register can be controlled to switch to output ports or segment outputs by the segment output disable register. 2: When the VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) of the LCD power control register (address 003816) is "1", settings of the segment output disable bit 22 and segment output disable bit 23 are invalid. 3: LCDCK is a clock for an LCD timing controller. SOURCE represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode. Fig. 38 Structure of LCD related registers Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 46 of 131 Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Address 0041 16 Fig. 39 Block diagram of LCD controller/driver Page 47 of 131 Level shift Level shift Level shift P2 0/SEG 16 Level shift P2 7/ V SS P2 6/ V L3 SEG 22/ SEG 23 / V L2 V L1 5 2 Level Level Level shift shift shift COM 0 COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 Common Common Common Common driver driver driver driver Level shift Timing controller 2 Duty ratio selection bits LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits LCD enable bit LCD power control register Bias control bit Bias control LCD display RAM P2 6 /SEG 22 /V L1 P2 7 /SEG 23 /V L2 Segment Segment driver driver Level shift Selector Selector Address 004C 16 Notes 1: SOURCE represents the supply source of internal clock . X IN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and sub clock in the low-speed mode. P0 0/SEG 0 P0 1/SEG 1 P02 /SEG 2 P0 3/SEG 3 Segment Segment Segment Segment driver driver driver driver Level shift Selector Selector Selector Selector Address 0040 16 Data bus LCDCK LCD divider "1" "0" SOURCE/8192 f(X CIN )/32 LCDCK count source selection bit 38D2 Group 38D2 Group * Bias Control and Applied Voltage to LCD Power Input Pins When the voltage is applied from the LCD power input pins (VL1-VL3), set the VL pin input selection bit (bit 5 of the LCD power control register) and VL3 connection bit (bit 6 of LCD power control register) to "1", apply the voltage value shown in Table 12 according to the bias value. In this case, SEG22 pin and SEG23 pin cannot be used. Select a bias value by the bias control bit (bit 2 of the LCD mode register). * Common Pin and Duty Ratio Control The common pins (COM0-COM3) to be used are determined by duty ratio. Select duty ratio by the duty ratio selection bits (bits 0 and 1 of the LCD mode register). When reset is released, VCC voltage is output from the common pin. Table 13 Duty ratio control and common pins used Duty ratio 2 3 4 Table 12 Bias control and applied voltage to VL1-VL3 Bias value 1/3 bias 1/2 bias Voltage value VL3 = VLCD VL2 = 2/3 VLCD VL1 = 1/3 VLCD VL3 = VLCD VL2 = VL1 = 1/2 VLCD Note: VLCD is the maximum value of supplied voltage for the LCD panel. Duty ratio selection bits Common pins used Bit 1 Bit 0 0 1 COM0, COM1 1 0 COM0-COM2 1 1 COM0-COM3 Note: Unused common pin outputs the unselected waveform. * Segment Signal Output Pin The segment signal output pins (SEG0-SEG23) are shared with ports P0-P2. When these pins are used as the segment signal output pins, set the direction registers of the corresponding pins to "1", and set the segment output disable register to "0". Also, these pins are set to the input port after reset, the V CC voltage is output by the pull-up resistor. Contrast adjust Contrast adjust VL3 VL3 R1 R4 VL2 VL2 R2 VL1 VL1 R3 1/3 bias R1 = R2 = R3 Fig. 40 Example of circuit at each bias (at external power input) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 48 of 131 R5 1/2 bias R4 = R5 38D2 Group * LCD Power Circuit The LCD power circuit has the dividing resistor for LCD power which can be connected/disconnected with the LCD power control register. To use the LCD, apply a voltage externally to the VL3 pin and set the VL3 connect bit to "1". An external voltage should be applied b7 even if a voltage equivalent to VCC is used for the VL3 pin. When the LCD is not used, perform either of the following. * Set the VL3 connect bit to "0" and leave the VL3 pin open. * Set the VL3 connect bit to "1" and apply a VCC level to VL3 pin. b0 LCD power control register (VLCON : address 001416) Dividing resistor for LCD power control bit (LCDRON) 0 : Internal dividing resistor disconnected from LCD power circuit 1 : Internal dividing resistor connected to LCD power circuit Dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits (RSEL) (Note 1) b2b1 1 0 : Larger resistor 0 1: 0 0: 1 1 : Smaller resistor Not used (Do not write to "1".) VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) (Note 2) 0 : Input invalid 1 : VL input function valid VL3 connection bit 0 : Connect LCD internal VL3 to VCC 1 : Connect LCD internal VL3 to VL3 pin Not used (Do not write to "1".) Notes 1: When voltage is applied to VL1 to VL3 by using the external resistor, write "102" to dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits. 2: Setting to the VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) = "1" has the most priority than setting to the port P2 direction register (address 000516) and segment output disable register 2 (address 0FF616). Fig. 41 Structure of LCD power control register VL3 connection bit Vcc LCD internal VL3 VL3 VL pin input selection bit Dividing resistor for LCD power control bit P27/SEG23/VL2 LCD internal VL2 P26/SEG22/VL1 LCD internal VL1 Dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits Dividing resistor for LCD power Fig. 42 VL block diagram Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 49 of 131 Bias control bit (LCD mode register) 38D2 Group * LCD Display RAM The 12-byte area of address 004016 to 004B16 is the designated RAM for the LCD display. When "1" is written to these addresses, the corresponding segments of the LCD display panel are turned on. * LCD Drive Timing For the LCD drive timing, type A or type B can be selected. The LCD drive timing is selected by the timing selection bit (bit 4 of LCD mode register). Type A is selected by setting the LCD drive timing selection bit to "0", type B is selected by setting the bit to "1". Type A is selected after reset. Bit Address 7 004016 004116 004216 004316 004416 004516 004616 004716 004816 004916 004A16 004B16 6 SEG1 SEG3 SEG5 SEG7 SEG9 SEG11 SEG13 SEG15 SEG17 SEG19 SEG21 SEG23 5 The LCDCK timing frequency (LCD drive timing) is generated internally and the frame frequency can be determined with the following equation; f(LCDCK) = (frequency of count source for LCDCK) (divider division ratio for LCD) Frame frequency = f(LCDCK) duty ratio (1) When the STP instruction is executed, the following bits are set to "0"; * LCD enable bit (bit 3 of LCD mode register) * Bits other than bit 6 of the LCD power control register. And the LCD panel turns off. To make the LCD panel turn on after returning from the stop mode, set these bits to "1". (2) When the voltage is applied to VL1 to VL3 by using the external resistor, write "102" to dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits (RSEL) of the LCD power control register (address 003816). (3) When the LCD drive control circuit is used at VL3 = VCC, apply VCC to VL3 pin and write "1" to VL3 connection bit of the LCD power control register (address 003816). 4 3 2 1 0 SEG0 SEG2 SEG4 SEG6 SEG8 SEG10 SEG12 SEG14 SEG16 SEG18 SEG20 SEG22 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 Fig. 43 LCD display RAM map Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 50 of 131 38D2 Group Internal signal LCDCK timing 1/4 duty Voltage level VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 VL3 VSS SEG0 LCD ON OFF COM3 COM2 COM1 ON OFF COM0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 1/3 duty VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 VL3 VSS SEG0 LCD ON COM0 ON OFF COM2 COM1 OFF COM0 COM2 ON COM1 OFF COM0 COM2 1/2 duty VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 VL3 VSS SEG0 LCD ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 Fig. 44 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias, type A) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 51 of 131 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 38D2 Group Internal signal LCDCK timing 1/4 duty Voltage level VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 VL3 SEG0 VSS OFF LCD COM3 ON COM2 COM1 OFF COM0 COM3 ON COM2 COM1 COM0 1/3 duty VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 VL3 SEG0 VSS LCD ON COM0 OFF COM2 ON COM1 OFF COM0 COM2 ON COM1 OFF COM0 COM2 1/2 duty VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 VL3 SEG0 VSS LCD ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 Fig. 45 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias, type A) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 52 of 131 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 38D2 Group Internal signal LCDCK timing 1/4 duty 1 frame Voltage level 1 frame VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 VL3 SEG0 VSS LCD OFF COM3 ON COM2 1/3 duty COM1 OFF COM0 COM3 1 frame ON COM2 COM1 COM0 1 frame VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 VL3 SEG0 VSS LCD ON OFF COM0 COM2 1/2 duty ON COM1 1 frame OFF COM0 COM2 1 frame ON COM1 OFF COM0 1 frame COM2 1 frame VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 VL3 SEG0 VSS LCD ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 Fig. 46 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias, type B) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 53 of 131 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 38D2 Group Internal signal LCDCK timing 1/4 duty 1 frame Voltage level 1 frame VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS SEG0 LCD OFF COM3 ON COM2 1/3 duty COM1 OFF COM0 COM3 1 frame ON COM2 COM1 COM0 1 frame VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 COM2 VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS SEG0 LCD ON OFF COM0 COM2 1/2 duty ON COM1 1 frame OFF COM0 COM2 1 frame ON COM1 OFF COM0 1 frame COM2 1 frame VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS COM0 COM1 VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS SEG0 LCD ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 Fig. 47 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias, type B) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 54 of 131 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 38D2 Group ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION A part of program in ROM can be corrected. Set the start address of the corrected ROM data (i.e. an Op code address of the beginning instruction) to the ROM correction address high-order and low-order registers. When the program is being executed and the value of the program counter matches with the set address value in the ROM correction address registers, the program is branched to the ROM correction vectors and then the correction program can be executed by setting it to the ROM correction vectors. Use the JMP instruction (3-byte instruction) to return the main program from the correction program. The correctable area is up to two. There are two vectors for ROM correction. Also, ROM correction vector can be selected from the RAM area or ROM area by the ROM correction memory selection bit. ROM correction address 1 high-order register (RCA1H) 0FF816 ROM correction address 1 low-order register (RCA1L) 0FF916 ROM correction address 2 high-order register (RCA2H) 0FFA16 ROM correction address 2 low-order register (RCA2L) 0FFB16 Note: Do not set address other than ROM area. Fig. 48 ROM correction address register 000016 SFR area Zero page 004016 Vector 1 Vector 2 RAM area RC2 = "0" address 010016 address 012016 ROM area RC2 = "1" address F10016 address F12016 RAM 012016 ROM correction vector 2 02BF16 The ROM correction function is controlled by the ROM correction address 1 enable bit and ROM correction address 2 enable bit. If the ROM correction function is not used, the ROM correction vector may be used as normal RAM/ROM. When using the ROM correction vector as normal RAM/ROM, make sure to set bits 1 and 0 in the ROM correction enable register to "0" (Disable). 1. When using the ROM correction function, set the ROM correction address registers and then enable the ROM correction with the ROM correction enable register. 2. Do not set addresses other than the ROM area in the ROM correction address registers. Do not set the same ROM correction addresses in both the ROM correction address registers 1 and ROM correction address registers 2. 3. It is necessary to contain the process for ROM correction in the program. 010016 ROM correction vector 1 ~ ~ ~ ~ C00016 Reserved ROM area C08016 Protect area 1 EFFF16 F10016 ROM correction vector 1 ROM F12016 ROM correction vector 2 FF0016 FFDB16 FFFF16 Special page Reserved ROM area Interrupt vector area Fig. 49 Memory map of M38D24G4 b7 b0 ROM correction enable register (Address 0FFC 16) RCR ROM correction address 1 enable bit (RC0) 0 : Disable 1 : Enable ROM correction address 2 enable bit (RC1) 0 : Disable 1 : Enable ROM correction memory selection bit (RC2) 0 : Branch to the RAM area 1 : Branch to the ROM area Not used (returns "0" when read) Note: After ROM correction address register is set, set the ROM correction address enable bit to be enabled. Fig. 50 Structure of ROM correction enable register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 55 of 131 38D2 Group WATCHDOG TIMER The watchdog timer gives a mean of returning to the reset status when a program cannot run on a normal loop (for example, because of a software run-away). The watchdog timer consists of an 8-bit counter. * Initial Value of Watchdog Timer At reset or writing to the watchdog timer control register, each watchdog timer is set to "FF16". Instructions such as STA, LDM and CLB to generate the write signals can be used. The written data in bits 7, 6 or 5 are not valid, and the above values are set. Bits 7 to 5 can be rewritten only once after releasing reset. After rewriting it is disable to write any data to this bit. This bit becomes "0" after reset. * Standard Operation of Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer is in the stop state at reset and the watchdog timer starts to count down by writing an optional value in the watchdog timer control register. An internal reset occurs at an underflow of the watchdog timer. Then, reset is released after the reset release time is elapsed, the program starts from the reset vector address. Normally, writing to the watchdog timer control register before an underflow of the watchdog timer is programmed. If writing to the watchdog timer control register is not executed, the watchdog timer does not operate. When reading the watchdog timer control register is executed, the contents of the high-order 5-bit counter, the count source selection bit 2 (bit 5), the STP instruction function selection bit (bit 6), and the count source selection bit (bit 7) are read out. (1) "0" Data bus "0" 1/1024 On-chip oscillator 1/4 "1" 1. The watchdog timer continues to count even during the wait time set by timer 1 and timer 2 to release the stop state and in the wait mode. Accordingly, write to the watchdog timer control register to not underflow the watchdog timer in this time. 2. When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2, the on-chip oscillator forcibly oscillates and it cannot be stopped. Also, in this time, set the STP instruction function selection bit to "1" at this time. Select "0" (SOURCE) the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 at the system which on-chip oscillator is stopped. Watchdog timer count source selection bit Watchdog timer count sourse selection bit 2 SOURCE * Bit 6 of Watchdog Timer Control Register 1. When bit 6 of the watchdog timer control register is "0", the MCU enters the stop mode by execution of STP instruction. Just after releasing the stop mode, the watchdog timer restarts counting (Note 1). When executing the WIT instruction, the watchdog timer does not stop. 2. When bit 6 is "1", execution of STP instruction causes an internal reset. When this bit is set to "1" once, it cannot be rewritten to "0" by program. Bit 6 is "0" at reset. 3. The time until the underflow of the watchdog timer register after writing to the watchdog timer control register is executed is as follows (when the bit 7 of the watchdog timer control register is "0"); 4. at XIN mode (f(XIN)) = 8 MHz): 32.768 ms 5. at low-speed mode (f(XCIN) = 32 KHz): 8.19s "1" 1/4 Watchdog timer L (3) Watchdog timer H (5) "FF16" is set when watchdog timer control register is written to. Undefined instruction Reset STP instruction function selection bit Reset circuit STP instruction RESET Internal reset Wait until reset release Note1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode Fig. 51 Block diagram of watchdog timer b7 b0 Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON : address 002916) Watchdog timer H (for read-out of high-order 5 bit) "FF16" is set to watchdog timer by writing to these bits. Watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 0 : SOURCE (1) 1 : On-chip oscillator/4 STP instruction function selection bit 0 : Entering stop mode by execution of STP instruction 1 : Internal reset by execution of STP instruction Watchdog timer count source selection bit 0 : Count source/1024 1 : Count source/4 Fig. 52 Structure of watchdog timer control register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 56 of 131 Notes 1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 , or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode 2: When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2, set the STP instruction function selection bit to "1". Select (SOURCE) as the count source at the system which on-chip oscillator is stopped. 3: Bits 7 to 5 can be rewritten only once after reset. After rewriting it is disable to write any data to this bit. 38D2 Group CLOCK OUTPUT FUNCTION A system clock can be output from I/O port P36. The triple function of I/O port, timer 2 output function and system clock output function is performed by the clock output control register (address 0FF316) and the timer 2 output selection bit of the timer 12 mode register (address 002516). In order to output a system clock from I/O port P36, set the timer 2 output selection bit and bit 0 of the clock output control register to "1". When the clock output function is selected, a clock is output while the direction register of port P36 is set to the output mode. P36 is switched to the port output or the output (timer 2 output and the clock output) except port at the cycle after the timer 2 output control bit is switched. b7 b0 Clock output control register (CKOUT : address 0FF316) P36 clock output control bit 0 : Timer 2 output 1 : System clock output Not used (returns "0" when read) Not used (Do not write "1" to these bits.) Fig. 53 Structure of clock output control register Timer 2 output control bit Timer 2 latch (8) Timer 2 (8) S 1/2 T T2OUT output edge switch bit Q "0" "1" Q "0" "1" P36/T2OUT/CKOUT P36 clock output control bit System clock P36 latch P36 direction register Timer 2 output selection bit b7 b0 Timer 12 mode register (address 002516) T12M Timer 2 output selection bit 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 2 output Fig. 54 Block diagram of clock output function Other function registers [RRF register (RRFR)] The RRF register (address 001216) is the 8-bit register and does not have the control function. As for the value written in this register, high-order 4 bits and low-order 4 bits interchange. It is initialized after reset. b7 b0 RRF register (RRFR : address 001216) DB4 data storage DB5 data storage DB6 data storage DB7 data storage DB0 data storage DB1 data storage DB2 data storage DB3 data storage Fig. 55 Structure of RRF register Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 57 of 131 38D2 Group RESET CIRCUIT To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an "L" level for 2 s or more. Then the RESET pin is returned to an "H" level (the power source voltage should be between VCC (min.) and 5.5 V), reset is released. After the reset is completed, the program starts from the address contained in address FFFD 16 (high-order byte) and address FFFC16 (low-order byte). Make sure that the reset input voltage meets VIL spec. When a power source voltage passes VCC (min.). In the flash memory version, input to the RESET pin in the following procedure. * When power source is stabilized (1) Input "L" level for 2s or more to RESET pin. (2) Input "H" level to RESET pin. * At power-on (1) Input "L" level to RESET pin. (2) Increase the power source voltage to 2.7 V. (3) Wait for td(P-R) until internal power source has stabilized. (4) Input "H" level to RESET pin. In the QzROM version, the input level applied to the OSCSEL pin is determined when the RESET pin changes from "L" to "H". VCC VCC (min.) 0V VCC RESET RESET 0.2VCC or less 0V (1) 5V VCC 2.7 V 0V 5V VCC RESET RESET 0V td(P-R) or more Power source voltage detection circuit Note 1: QzROM version: 2 s or more Flash memory version: td(P-R) or more Fig. 56 Reset circuit example OSCSEL=L: OCO OSCSEL=H: XIN ****** System clock RESET Internal reset Reset address from vector table Address ? Data ? ? ? FFFC ADL FFFD ADH, ADL ADH SYNC OSCSEL=L: OCO= about 32768 cycles OSCSEL=H: XIN= about 8192 cycles Notes 1: The frequency of system clock is f(OCO)/32 or f(XIN)/8. 2: The question marks (?) indicate an undefined state. 3: In the QzROM version, the input level applied to the OSCSEL pin is determined when the RESET pin changes from "L" to "H". Fig. 57 Reset sequence Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 58 of 131 38D2 Group Address 000016 Register contents 0016 (36) Timer X (low-order) Port P0 direction register 000116 0016 Port P1 000216 0016 (4) Port P1 direction register 000316 (5) Port P2 (6) Address 002A16 Register contents FF16 (37) Timer X (high-order) 002B16 FF16 (38) Timer X (extension) 002C16 0016 0016 (39) Timer X mode register 002D16 0016 000416 0016 (40) Timer X control register 1 002E16 0016 Port P2 direction register 000516 0016 (41) Timer X control register 2 002F16 0016 (7) Port P3 000616 0016 (42) Compare register 1 (low-order) 003016 0016 (8) Port P3 direction register 000716 0016 (43) Compare register 1 (high-order) 003116 0016 (9) Port P4 000816 0016 (44) Compare register 2 (low-order) 003216 0016 (10) Port P4 direction register 000916 0016 (45) Compare register 2 (high-order) 003316 0016 (11) Port P5 000A16 0016 (46) Compare register 3 (low-order) 003416 0016 (12) Port P5 direction register 000B16 0016 (47) Compare register 3 (high-order) 003516 0016 (13) Port P6 000C16 0016 (48) Timer Y (low-order) 003616 FF16 (14) Port P6 direction register 000D16 0016 (49) Timer Y (high-order) 003716 FF16 (15) Oscillation output control register 001016 0016 (50) Timer Y mode register 003816 0016 (51) Timer Y control register 003916 0016 (52) Interrupt edge selection register 003A16 0016 (1) Port P0 (2) (3) (17) RRF register 001116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0016 001216 (18) LCD mode register 001316 0016 (53) CPU mode register (19) LCD power control register 001416 0016 (54) Interrupt request register 1 003B16 * 1 * 0 0 0 0 0 0016 003C16 (20) AD control register 001516 0816 (55) Interrupt request register 2 003D16 0016 (21) Serial I/O1 status register (56) Interrupt control register 1 003E16 0016 (22) Serial I/O1 control register 001916 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0016 001A16 (57) Interrupt control register 2 003F16 0016 (23) UART1 control register 001B16 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 (58) PULL register 0FF016 0016 (24) Serial I/O2 status register (59) UART2 control register (25) Serial I/O2 control register 001E16 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0016 001F16 0FF116 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0016 0FF316 (26) Timer 1 002016 FF16 (61) Segment output disable register 0 0FF416 FF16 (27) Timer 2 002116 0116 (62) Segment output disable register 1 0FF516 FF16 (28) Timer 3 002216 FF16 (63) Segment output disable register 2 0FF616 FF16 (29) Timer 4 002316 FF16 (64) Key input control register 0FF716 0016 (30) PWM01 register 002416 0016 0FF816 0016 (31) Timer 12 mode register 002516 0016 (65) high-order register (RCA1H) ROM correction address 1 (66) low-order register (RCA1L) 0FF916 0016 (32) Timer 34 mode register (33) Timer 1234 mode register 002616 0016 0FFA16 0016 002716 0016 0FFB16 0016 1234 frequency division (34) Timer selection register 002816 0016 (16) CPU mode register 2 (35) Watchdog timer control register 002916 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 (60) Clock output control register ROM correction address 1 correction address 2 (67) ROM high-order register (RCA2H) correction address 2 (68) ROM low-order register (RC2AL) 0016 (69) ROM correction enable register 0FFC16 (PS) x x x x x 1 x x (70) Processor status register (PCH) (71) Program counter FFFD16 contents (PCL) FFFC16 contents x: Not fixed *: Depends on OSCSEL setting at the QzROM version. In the flash memory version, the CPU mode register 2 (address 001116), is set to "0016" and the CPU mode register (address 003B16) is set to "E016". Since the initial values for other than above mentioned registers and RAM contents are indefinite at reset, they must be set. Fig. 58 Internal status at reset Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 59 of 131 38D2 Group CLOCK GENERATING CIRCUIT The oscillation circuit of 38D2 Group can be formed by connecting an oscillator, capacitor and resistor between XIN and XOUT (XCIN and XCOUT). To supply a clock signal externally, input it to the XIN pin and make the XOUT pin open. The clocks that are externally generated cannot be directly input to XCIN. Use the circuit constants in accordance with the oscillator manufacturer's recommended values. No external resistor is needed between XIN and XOUT since a feed-back resistor exists on-chip. (An external feed-back resistor may be needed depending on conditions.) However, an about 10 M external feedback resistor is needed between XCIN and XCOUT. The 38D2 Group operation mode immediately after reset depends on the OSCSEL pin state in the QzROM version. When the OSCSEL pin state is GND level, the only on-chip oscillator starts oscillating. The XIN -XOUT oscillation stops oscillating, and XCIN and X COUT pins function as I/O ports. Flash memory version as same. When the OSCSEL pin state is V CC level, the X IN -X OUT oscillation divided by 8 starts oscillating. The on-chip oscillator stops oscillating, and the XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. Note the following in each mode. * XIN Mode The XIN-XOUT oscillation does not stop even if the XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit is set to "1". * Low-Speed Mode The XCIN-XCOUT oscillation stops if the port XC switch bit is set to "0". * On-Chip Oscillator Mode Even if the on-chip oscillator stop bit is set to "1", the on-chip oscillator oscillation does not stop in the flash memory version, but stops in the QzROM version. * Frequency Control (1) On-chip oscillation mode The system clock is the on-chip oscillator oscillation divided by 32. (2) XIN mode Frequency/2 mode, frequency /4 mode, and frequency/8 mode are collectively referred as XIN mode. - Frequency/8 Mode The system clock is the frequency of XIN divided by 8. - Frequency/4 Mode The system clock is the frequency of XIN divided by 4. - Frequency/2 Mode The system clock is half the frequency of XIN. (3)Low-speed Mode The system clock is half the frequency of sub clock. After reset and when system returns from the stop mode, the operation mode depends on the OSCSEL pin state in the QzROM version and the flash memory version operation mode is the on-chip oscillator mode. When the RESET pin changes from "L" to "H" and when the STP instruction is executed, determine the input level applied to the OSCSEL pin. Refer to the clock state transition diagram for the setting of transition to each mode. The XIN-OUT oscillation is controlled by the bit 5 of CPUM, and the sub-clock oscillation is controlled by the bit 4 of CPUM and the on-chip oscillator oscillation is controlled by the bit 0 of CPUM2. In the on-chip oscillator mode, the oscillation by the oscillator can be stopped. In the low-speed mode, the power consumption can be reduced by stopping the XIN-XOUT oscillation. In low-speed mode, the on-chip oscillator stops in the QzROM version regardless of the on-chip oscillator stop bit value. The on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, so set the on-chip oscillator stop bit to "1" to stop the oscillation. Set enough time for oscillation to stabilize by programming to restart the stopped oscillation and switch the operation mode. Also, set enough time for oscillation to stabilize by programming to switch the timer count source. If you switch the mode between on-chip oscillator mode, XIN mode and low-speed mode, stabilize both X IN and X CIN oscillations. Especially be careful immediately after power-on and at returning from stop mode. Refer to the clock state transition diagram for the setting of transition to each mode. Set the frequency in the condition that f(XIN) > 3*f(XCIN). When the X IN mode is not used (X IN -X OUT oscillation and external clock input are not performed), connect XIN to V CC through a resistor. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 60 of 131 38D2 Group * Oscillation Control (1) Stop Mode If the STP instruction is executed, the system clock stops at an "H" level, and main clock and sub-clock oscillators stop. In this time, values set previously to timer 1 latch and timer 2 latch are loaded automatically to timer 1 and timer 2. Set the values * to generate the wait time required for oscillation stabilization to timer 1 latch and timer 2 latch (low-order 8 bits of timer 1 and high-order 8 bits of timer 2) before the STP instruction. The frequency divider for timer 1 is used for the timer 1 count source, and the output of timer 1 is forcibly connected to timer 2. In this time, bits 0 to 5 of the timer 12 mode register are cleared to "0". The values of the timer 1234 frequency divider selection register are not changed. Set the interrupt enable bits of the timer 1 and timer 2 to be disabled ("0") before executing the STP instruction. *: Reference (Set values according to your oscillator and system.) OSCSEL = "L" of the QzROM version and flash memory version: .......................................................................... 000516 or more OSCSEL = "H" of the QzROM version: ..........................................................................01FF16 or more When an external interrupt is received, the clock set according to the OSCSEL pin state starts oscillating in the QzROM version. The operation mode at returning is decided by the clock that set according to the OSCSEL pin state. Bits 3, 5, 6, and 7 of CPUM and bit 0 of CPUM2 are forcibly changed by the OSCSEL pin state. In the flash memory version, the on-chip oscillator starts oscillating and the operation mode at returning is set to on-chip oscillator mode. The bit 3 of CPUM is changed to "0", bits 5, 6 and 7 of CPUM are changed to "1", and the bit 0 of CPUM2 is changed to "0" forcibly. Oscillator restarts when reset occurs or an interrupt request is received, but the system clock is not supplied to the CPU until timer 2 underflows. This allows time for the clock circuit oscillation to stabilize. (2) Wait Mode If the WIT instruction is executed, only the system clock stops at an "H" state. The states of main clock, on-chip oscillator and sub clock are the same as the state before executing the WIT instruction, and oscillation does not stop. Since supply of system clock is started immediately after the interrupt is received, the instruction can be executed immediately. XCIN XCOUT Rf CCIN XIN Rd Rd CCOUT COUT Fig. 59 Ceramic resonator circuit example XCIN XCOUT Rf XIN XOUT Open Rd External oscillation circuit CCIN CCOUT VCC Fig. 60 External clock input circuit Page 61 of 131 CIN Note : Insert a damping resistor if required. The resistance will vary depending on the oscillator and the oscillation drive capacity setting. Use the value recommended by the maker of the oscillator. Also, if the oscillator manufacturer's data sheet specifies that a feedback resistor be added external to the chip though a feedback resistor exists on-chip, insert a feedback resistor between XIN and XOUT following the instruction. VSS Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 XOUT 38D2 Group On-chip oscillator CPUM2 BIT0 On-chip oscillator stop bit "0" 1/4 XIN XOUT Main clock division ratio selection bit CPUM BIT7, 6 (2) "11" "00" "01" "10" XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit CPUM BIT5 XCOUT XCIN "0" Internal system clock selection bit CPUM BIT3 (1) "1" SOURCE Timer 1 count source selection bits "01" (3) Timer 1 Frequency divider for Timer 1/2 Timer 2 "00" "10" 1/2 1/2 "1" "1" Port Xc switch bit CPUM BIT4 Timer 2 count source selection bits "00" "0" Main clock division ratio selection bit "0" CPUM BIT6 "0" Internal system clock selection bit "1" System clock Q S R S STP instruction WIT instruction R Q Q S R STP instruction Reset Interrupt disable flag I Interrupt request Notes 1: When the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation is selected as the system clock, set the port Xc switch bit to "1". 2: Although a feed-back resistor exists on-chip, an external feed-back resistor may be needed depending on conditions. 3: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode However, when used as the A/D conversion clock by the A/D converter, SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the low-speed or the on-chip oscillator mode Fig. 61 Clock generating circuit block diagram Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 62 of 131 38D2 Group Low-speed mode On-chip oscillator mode XIN stop XCIN stop OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=1 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=0 CM5 * QzROM version * Flash memory version OSCSEL=L XIN oscillation XCIN stop OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=0 XIN stop XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=1 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=0 CM4 CM4 CM5 CM3, CM8 (6) XIN stop XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=1 (invalid) CM6=1 (invalid) CM5=1 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1 CM5 (CM7) CM5 XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=0 CM4 CM3, CM7, CM8 (6) XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=0 (invalid) CM6=1 (invalid) CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1 (6) CM7 (6) CM7 CM3 Frequency/8 mode * QzROM version OSCSEL=H XIN oscillation (frequency/8) XCIN stop OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/8 CM7=0 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=* XIN oscillation (frequency/8) XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/8 CM7=0 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=* CM4 CM6 CM5 CM6 CM5 (CM7) CM6 (CM7) CM6 Reset release (14) XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=1 (invalid) CM6=0 (invalid) CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1 XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=0 (invalid) CM6=0 (invalid) CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1 CM3 CM3 CM6 CM7 CM6 CM7 CM6 CM6 Frequency/4 mode Frequency/2 mode XIN oscillation (frequency/2) XCIN stop OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/2 CM7=0 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=* CM4 XIN oscillation (frequency/2) XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/2 CM7=0 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=* XIN oscillation (frequency/4) XCIN stop OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/4 CM7=1 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=* XIN oscillation (frequency/4) XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/4 CM7=1 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=* CM4 * : The OCO oscillating at "0"; the OCO stopped at "1". b7 Notes 1: Switch the mode by the arrows shown between the mode blocks. The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode. 2: Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode. System is returned to the source mode when the wait mode is ended. 3: The CM4 value is retained in the stop mode. When the stop mode is ended, the operation mode varies as follows: In the QzROM version: Mode set by the OSCSEL pin state In the flash memory version: On-chip oscillator mode The input level applied to the OSCSEL pin is determined when executing the STP instruction. 4: Before executing the STP instruction, set the values to generate the wait time required for oscillation stabilization to timer 1 and timer 2, and set to "0" (interrupts disabled) to the interrupt enable bits of timer 1 and timer 2. 5: Execute the transition after the oscillation used in the destination mode is stabilized. 6: When system goes to on-chip oscillator mode, the oscillation stabilizing wait time is not needed. 7: The on-chip oscillator can be stopped in all kinds of state of frequency/ 2,4 mode. 8: In all XIN mode, stop of on-chip oscillator is enabled. 9: The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. f(OCO) indicates the oscillation frequency of onchip oscillator. 10: When selecting the on-chip oscillator for the WDT clock, the on-chip oscillator does not stop. Also, in low-speed mode, the on-chip oscillator stops in the QzROM version regardless of the on-chip oscillator stop bit value. The on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, so set this bit to "1" to stop the oscillation. In on-chip oscillator mode, even if this bit is set to "1", the on-chip oscillator oscillation does not stop in the flash memory version, but stops in the QzROM version. 11: In low-speed mode, the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation stops if the port XC switch bit is set to "0". 12: In XIN mode, the XIN-XOUT oscillation does not stop even if the XINXOUT oscillation stop bit is set to "1". 13: 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. 14: In the flash memory version, set the on-chip oscillator stop bit to "1" (oscillation stops) because OCO is in the state set by the setting value of the on-chip oscillator stop bit. Fig. 62 State transitions of system clock Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 63 of 131 b0 CM8 CPU mode register 2 CPUM2 (address 001116, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, ( Flash memory version, initial value: 0016) initial value: 0116) initial value: 0016) On-chip oscillator stop bit 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Not used (do not write "1") Not used (returns "0" when read) Not used (do not write "1") b7 b0 CM7 CM6 CM5 CM4 CM3 CM2 CM1 CM0 CPU mode register CPUM (address 003B16, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, ( Flash memory version, Processor mode bits b1 b0 0 0 : Single-chip mode 0 1: 1 0 : Not available 1 1: Stack page selection bit 0 : 0 page 1 : 1 page Internal system clock selection bit 0 : Main clock selected (includes OCO, XIN) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT selected Port Xc switch bit (11) 0 : I/O port function (Oscillation stop) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT oscillating function XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit (12) 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Main clock division ratio selection bit (Valid only when CM3=0) (13) b7 b8 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 : : : : f(XIN)/2 (frequency/2 mode) f(XIN)/8 (frequency/8 mode) f(XIN)/4 (frequency/4 mode) On-chip oscillator initial value: E016) initial value: 4016) initial value: E016) 38D2 Group * Oscillation External Output Function The 38D2 group has the oscillation external output function to output the rectangular waveform of the clock obtained by the oscillation circuits from P41 and P40. In order to validate the oscillation external output function, set P40 or P41, or both to the output mode (set the corresponding direction register to "1"). The level of the XCOUT external output signal becomes "H" by the P40/P41 oscillation output control bits (bits 0 and 1) of the oscillation output control register (address 0010 16 ) in the following states; * the function to output the signal from the XCOUT pin externally is selected * the sub clock (XCIN-XCOUT) is in the stop oscillating or stop mode. Likewise, the level of the XOUT external output signal becomes "H" by the P40/P41 oscillation output control bits (bits 0 and 1) of the oscillation output control register (address 001016) in the following states; * the function to output the signal from the XOUT pin externally is selected * the main clock (XIN-XOUT) is in the stop oscillating or stop mode. P61/XCIN When the signal from the X OUT pin or X COUT pin of the oscillation circuit is input directly to the circuit except this MCU and used, the system operation may be unstabilized. In order to share the oscillation circuit safely, use the clock output from P40 and P41 by this function for the circuits except this MCU. b7 b0 Oscillation output control register (OSCOUT : address 001016) P40/P41 oscillation output control bits b1 b0 0 0 : P41, P40 = Normal port 0 1 : P41 = Normal port, P40 = XOUT 1 0 : P41 = Normal port, P40 = XCOUT 1 1 : P41 = XCOUT , P40 = XOUT Not used (Do not write to "1".) Fig. 63 Structure of oscillation output control register P62/XCOUT P41 output latch Port XC switch bit (CPUM Bit 4) P40 output latch P41 direction register Oscillation output selection circuit XIN XOUT P41/OOUT1 P40/OOUT0 P40 direction register OSCOUT control XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit (CPUM Bit 5) Q S R STP instruction Reset Interrupt disable flag I Interrupt request Fig. 64 Block diagram of oscillation external output function Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 64 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM WRITING MODE In the QzROM writing mode, the user ROM area can be rewritten while the microcomputer is mounted on-board by using a serial programmer which is applicable for this microcomputer. Table 14 lists the pin description (QzROM writing mode) and Figure 65 shows the pin connection. Refer to Figure 66 to Figure 69 for examples of a connection with a serial programmer. Contact the manufacturer of your serial programmer for serial programmer. Refer to the user 's manual of your serial programmer for details on how to use it. Table 14 Pin description (QzROM writing mode) Pin VCC, VSS RESET XIN XOUT VREF AVSS P00-P07 P10-P17 P20-P27 P33-P37 P40-P47 P50-P57 P60-P62 OSCSEL P32 P31 P30 Name Power source Reset input Clock input Clock output Analog reference voltage Analog power source I/O port VPP input ESDA input/output ESCLK input ESPGMB input Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 I/O Input Input Input Output Input Function * Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to VCC, and 0 V to VSS. * Reset input pin for active "L". Reset occurs when RESET pin is held at an "L" level for 16 cycles or more of XIN. * Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. * Input the reference voltage of A/D converter to VREF. Input I/O * Connect AVss to Vss. * Input "H" or "L" level signal or leave the pin open. Input I/O Input Input * QzROM programmable power source pin. * Serial data I/O pin. * Serial clock input pin. * Read/program pulse input pin. Page 65 of 131 P0 4/SEG 4 P0 5/SEG 5 P0 6/SEG 6 P0 7/SEG 7 P1 0/SEG 8 P1 1/SEG 9 P1 2/SEG 10 P1 3/SEG 11 P1 4/SEG 12 P1 5/SEG 13 P1 6/SEG 14 P1 7/SEG 15 P2 0/SEG 16 P2 1/SEG 17 P2 2/SEG 18 P2 3/SEG 19 38D2 Group 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 49 32 50 31 51 30 52 29 53 28 54 27 55 26 56 M38D2XGXFP/HP 57 25 24 58 23 59 22 60 21 61 20 62 19 63 18 64 17 3 4 5 6 7 VPP RESET GND Vcc 8 P24/SEG20 P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 VL3 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 ESPGMB P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) ESCLK ESDA P32/TXD2/(LED2) P33/RXD2/(LED3) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RESET P6 2 /X COUT P6 1/X CIN V SS X IN X OUT V CC P6 0 /CNTR 1 P3 7/CNTR 0/T XOUT2/(LED 7) 2 P4 5/AN 5 P4 4/AN 4 P4 3/AN 3 1 P4 2/ADKEY/AN 2 P4 1/O OUT1/AN 1 P4 0/O OUT0 /AN 0 OSCSEL P03/SEG3/(KW7) P02/SEG2/(KW6) P01/SEG1/(KW5) P00/SEG0/(KW4) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P54/RXD1/(KW0) P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P51/INT1 P50/INT0 AVSS VREF P47/RTP1/AN7 P46/RTP0/AN6 * * : Connect to oscillation circuit. : QzROM pin Package type : PLQP0064GA-A(64P6U-A)/PLQP0064KB-A(64P6Q-A) Fig. 65 Pin connection diagram Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 66 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM version 38D2 Group Vcc Vcc OSCSEL 4.7 k 4.7 k P32 (ESDA) P31 (ESCLK) P30 (ESPGMB) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RESET circuit *1 RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. *1 : Open-collector buffer Note : For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF. Fig. 66 When using E8 programmer, connection example (1) (OSCSEL = "L") Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 67 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM version 38D2 Group Vcc VCC *2 Jumper switch OSCSEL 4.7 k 4.7 k P32 (ESDA) P31 (ESCLK) P30 (ESPGMB) 14 13 12 11 RESET circuit *1 10 9 8 7 RESET 6 5 3 Vss 4 2 1 AVss XIN XOUT Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. *1 : Open-collector buffer *2 : When programming 38D2 Group is performed, disconnect Vcc from OSCSEL by a jumper switch. Note : For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF. Fig. 67 When using E8 programmer, connection example (2) (OSCSEL = "H") Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 68 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM version 38D2 Group T_VDD Vcc T_VPP OSCSEL 4.7k 4.7k T_TXD T_RXD P32 (ESDA) T_SCLK P31 (ESCLK) T_BUSY N.C. T_PGM/OE/MD P30 (ESPGMB) RESET circuit RESET T_RESET GND Vss AVss XIN XOUT Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. Note: For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF. Fig. 68 When using programmer of Suisei Electronics System Co., LTD, connection example (1) (OSCSEL = "L") Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 69 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM version 38D2 Group T_VDD Vcc *1 Jumper switch T_VPP OSCSEL 4.7k 4.7k T_TXD T_RXD P32 (ESDA) T_SCLK P31 (ESCLK) T_BUSY N.C. T_PGM/OE/MD P30 (ESPGMB) RESET circuit RESET T_RESET GND Vss AVss XIN XOUT Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. *1 : When programming QzROM is performed, disconnect Vcc from OSCSEL by a jumper switch. Note: For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF. Fig. 69 When using programmer of Suisei Electronics System Co., LTD, connection example (2) (OSCSEL = "H") Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 70 of 131 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY MODE The 38D2 Group flash memory version has the flash memory that can be rewritten with a single power source. For this flash memory, three flash memory modes are available in which to read, program, and erase: the parallel I/O and standard serial I/O modes in which the flash memory can be manipulated using a programmer and the CPU rewrite mode in which the flash memory can be manipulated by the Central Processing Unit (CPU). For details of each mode, refer to the next and after pages. Contact the manufacturer of your programmer for the programmer. Refer to the user's manual of your programmer for details on how to use it. This flash memory version has some blocks on the flash memory as shown in Figure 70 and each block can be erased. In addition to the ordinary User ROM area to store the MCU operation control program, the flash memory has a Boot ROM area that is used to store a program to control rewriting in CPU rewrite and standard serial I/O modes. This Boot ROM area has had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from the factory. However, the user can write a rewrite control program in this area that suits the user's application system. This Boot ROM area can be rewritten in only parallel I/O mode. Performance overview Table 15 lists the performance overview of the 38D2 Group flash memory version. Table 15 Performance overview of 38D2 Group flash memory version Parameter Power source voltage (Vcc) Program/Erase VPP voltage (VPP) Flash memory mode Erase block division User ROM area/Data ROM area Boot ROM area (1) Program method Erase method Program/Erase control method Number of commands Number of program/Erase times ROM code protection NOTE: Function VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V 3 modes; Parallel I/O mode, Standard serial I/O mode, CPU rewrite mode Refer to Figure 70. Not divided (4K bytes) In units of bytes Block erase Program/Erase control by software command 5 commands 100 Available in parallel I/O mode and standard serial I/O mode 1. The Boot ROM area has had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from the factory. This Boot ROM area can be erased and written in only parallel I/O mode. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 71 of 131 38D2 Group Boot Mode The control program for CPU rewrite mode must be written into the User ROM or Boot ROM area in parallel I/O mode beforehand. (If the control program is written into the Boot ROM area, the standard serial I/O mode becomes unusable.) See Figure 70 for details about the Boot ROM area. Normal microcomputer mode is entered when the microcomputer is reset with pulling CNVSS pin low. In this case, the CPU starts operating using the control program in the User ROM area. When the microcomputer is reset and the CNVSS pin high after pulling the P32/TxD2 pin and CNVSS pin high, the CPU starts operating (start address of program is stored into addresses FFFC 16 and FFFD 16 ) using the control program in the Boot ROM area. This mode is called the "Boot mode". Also, User ROM area can be rewritten using the control program in the Boot ROM area. CPU Rewrite Mode In CPU rewrite mode, the internal flash memory can be operated on (read, program, or erase) under control of the Central Processing Unit (CPU). In CPU rewrite mode, only the User ROM area shown in Figure 70 can be rewritten; the Boot ROM area cannot be rewritten. Make sure the program and block erase commands are issued for only the User ROM area and each block area. The control program for CPU rewrite mode can be stored in either User ROM or Boot ROM area. In the CPU rewrite mode, because the flash memory cannot be read from the CPU, the rewrite control program must be transferred to internal RAM area before it can be executed. Block Address Block addresses refer to the maximum address of each block. These addresses are used in the block erase command. 000016 User ROM area SFR area 100016 004016 Internal RAM area (2K bytes) RAM 140016 180016 Data block B: 1K bytes Data block A: 1K bytes 083F16 Block 1: 26K bytes 0FE016 SFR area 800016 0FFF16 100016 Block 0: 32 K bytes Internal flash memory area (60K bytes) Notes1: The boot ROM area can be rewritten in a parallel I/O mode. (Access to except boot ROM area is disabled.) 2: To specify a block, use the maximum address in the block. 3: The QzROM version has the reserved ROM area. Note the difference of the area. F00016 Boot ROM area 4K bytes FFFF16 FFFF16 Fig 70. Block diagram of built-in flash memory Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 72 of 131 FFFF16 38D2 Group Outline Performance CPU rewrite mode is usable in the single-chip or Boot mode. The only User ROM area can be rewritten. In CPU rewrite mode, the CPU erases, programs and reads the internal flash memory as instructed by software commands. This rewrite control program must be transferred to internal RAM area before it can be executed. The MCU enters CPU rewrite mode by setting "1" to the CPU rewrite mode select bit (bit 1 of address 0FE016). Then, software commands can be accepted. Use software commands to control program and erase operations. Whether a program or erase operation has terminated normally or in error can be verified by reading the status register. Figure 71 shows the flash memory control register 0. Bit 0 of the flash memory control register 0 is the RY/BY status flag used exclusively to read the operating status of the flash memory. During programming and erase operations, it is "0" (busy). Otherwise, it is "1" (ready). Bit 1 of the flash memory control register 0 is the CPU rewrite mode select bit. When this bit is set to "1", the MCU enters CPU rewrite mode. And then, software commands can be accepted. In CPU rewrite mode, the CPU becomes unable to access the internal flash memory directly. Therefore, use the control program in the internal RAM for write to bit 1. To set this bit 1 to "1", it is necessary to write "0" and then write "1" in succession to bit 1. The bit can be set to "0" by only writing "0". Bit 2 of the flash memory control register 0 is the user block 1 E/W enable bit. By setting combination of bit 4 (user block 0 E/W enable bit) of the flash memory control register 2 (address 0FE216) and this bit as shown in Table 16, E/W is disabled to user block in the CPU rewriting mode. Bit 3 of the flash memory control register 0 is the flash memory reset bit used to reset the control circuit of internal flash memory. This bit is used when flash memory access has failed. When the CPU rewrite mode select bit is "1", setting "1" for this bit resets the control circuit. To release the reset, it is necessary to set this bit to "0". Bit 5 of the flash memory control register 0 is the User ROM area select bit and is valid only in the boot mode. Setting this bit to "1" in the boot mode switches an accessible area from the boot ROM area to the user ROM area. To use the CPU rewrite mode in the boot mode, set this bit to "1". To rewrite bit 5, execute the user original reprogramming control software transferred to the internal RAM in advance. Bit 6 of the flash memory control register 0 is the program status flag. This bit is set to "1" when writing to flash memory is failed. When program error occurs, the block cannot be used. Bit 7 of the flash memory control register 0 is the erase status flag. This bit is set to "1" when erasing flash memory is failed. When erase error occurs, the block cannot be used. Figure 72 shows the flash memory control register 1. Bit 0 of the flash memory control register 1 is the Erase suspend enable bit. By setting this bit to "1", the erase suspend mode to suspend erase processing temporary when block erase command is executed can be used. In order to set this bit 0 to "1", writing "0" and "1" in succession to bit 0. In order to set this bit to "0", write "0" only to bit 0. Bit 1 of the flash memory control register 1 is the erase suspend request bit. By setting this bit to "1" when erase suspend enable bit is "1", the erase processing is suspended. Bit 6 of the flash memory control register 1 is the erase suspend flag. This bit is cleared to "0" at the flash erasing. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 73 of 131 b7 b0 Flash memory control register 0 (FMCR0: address : 0FE016, initial value: 0116) RY/BY status flag 0 : Busy (being written or erased) 1 : Ready CPU rewrite mode select bit(1) 0 : CPU rewrite mode invalid 1 : CPU rewrite mode valid User block 1 E/W enable bit(1, 2) 0 : E/W disabled (180016-7FFF16) 1 : E/W enabled (180016-7FFF16) Flash memory reset bit(3, 4) 0 : Normal operation 1 : reset Not used (do not write "1" to this bit.) User ROM area select bit(5) 0 : Boot ROM area is accessed 1 : User ROM area is accessed Program status flag 0: Pass 1: Error Erase status flag 0: Pass 1: Error Notes 1: For this bit to be set to "1", the user needs to write a "0" and then a "1" to it in succession. For this bit to be set to "0", write "0" only to this bit. 2: This bit can be written only when CPU rewrite mode select bit is "1". 3: Effective only when the CPU rewrite mode select bit = "1". Fix this bit to "0" when the CPU rewrite mode select bit is "0". 4: When setting this bit to "1" (when the control circuit of flash memory is reset), the flash memory cannot be accessed for 10 s. 5: Write to this bit in program on RAM Fig 71. Structure of flash memory control register 0 b7 b0 Flash memory control register 1 (FMCR1: address: 0FE116, initial value: 4016) Erase Suspend enable bit(1) 0 : Suspend invalid 1 : Suspend valid Erase Suspend request bit(2) 0 : Erase restart 1 : Suspend request Not used (do not write "1" to this bit.) Erase Suspend flag 0 : Erase active 1 : Erase inactive (Erase Suspend mode) Not used (do not write "1" to this bit.) Notes 1: For this bit to be set to "1", the user needs to write a "0" and then a "1" to it in succession. For this bit to be set to "0", write "0" only to this bit. 2: Effective only when the suspend enable bit = "1". Fig 72. Structure of flash memory control register 1 38D2 Group b7 b0 Flash m em ory control register 2 (FM C R 2: address : 0FE2 16 , initial value: 45 16 ) N ot used (return "1" w hen read) N ot used (do not w rite "1" to this bit.) N ot used (return "1" w hen read) N ot used (return "0" w hen read) U ser block 0 E/W enable bit (1, 2) 0 : E/W disabled (8000 16 -FFFF 16 ) 1 : E/W enabled (8000 16 -FFFF 16 ) N ot used (return "0" w hen read) N ot used (return "1" w hen read) N ot used (return "0" w hen read) N otes 1: For this bit to be set to "1", the user needs to w rite a "0" and then a "1" to it in succession. For this bit to be set to "0", w rite "0" only to this bit. 2: Effective only w hen the C PU rew rite m ode select bit = "1". Fig 73. Structure of flash memory control register 2 Table 16 State of E/W inhibition function User block 0 E/W enable bit 0 0 1 1 User block 1 E/W enable bit 0 1 0 1 User block 0 Addresses 800016 to FFFF16 E/W disabled E/W disabled E/W enabled E/W enabled User block 1 Addresses 180016 to 7FFF16 E/W disabled E/W enabled E/W disabled E/W enabled Data block Addresses 100016 to 17FF16 E/W enabled E/W enabled E/W enabled E/W enabled Figure 74 shows a flowchart for setting/releasing CPU rewrite mode. Start Single-chip mode or Boot mode Set CPU mode register(1) Transfer CPU rewrite mode control program to internal RAM Jump to control program transferred to internal RAM (Subsequent operations are executed by control program in this RAM) Set CPU rewrite mode select bit to "1" (by writing "0" and then "1" in succession) Set user block 0 E/W enable bit to "1" (by writing "0" and then "1" in succession) Set user block 1 E/W enable bit (At E/W disabled; writing "0" , at E/W enabled; writing "0" and then "1" in succession Using software command executes erase, program, or other operation Execute read array command(2) Set user block 0 E/W enable bit to "0" Set user block 1 E/W enable bit to "0" Write "0" to CPU rewrite mode select bit End Notes 1: Set the main clock as follows depending on the clock division ratio selection bits of CPU mode register (bits 6, 7 of address 003B16). 2: Before exiting the CPU rewrite mode after completing erase or program operation, always be sure to execute the read array command. Fig 74. CPU rewrite mode set/release flowchart be sure to execute Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 74 of 131 38D2 Group Take the notes described below when rewriting the flash memory in CPU rewrite mode. (1) Operation speed During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock to 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). (2) Instructions inhibited against use The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash memory cannot be used during CPU rewrite mode. (3) Interrupts The interrupts cannot be used during CPU rewrite mode because they refer to the internal data of the flash memory. (4) Watchdog timer If the watchdog timer has been already activated, internal reset due to an underflow will not occur because the watchdog timer is surely cleared during program or erase. (5) Reset Reset is always valid. The MCU is activated using the boot mode at release of reset in the condition of CNVSS = "H", so that the program will begin at the address which is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16 of the boot ROM area. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 75 of 131 38D2 Group Software Commands Table 17 lists the software commands. After setting the CPU rewrite mode select bit to "1", execute a software command to specify an erase or program operation. Each software command is explained below. The RY/BY status flag is set to "0" during program operation and "1" when the program operation is completed as is the status register bit 7 (SR7). At program end, program results can be checked by reading the status register. * Read Array Command (FF16) The read array mode is entered by writing the command code "FF16" in the first bus cycle. When an address to be read is input in one of the bus cycles that follow, the contents of the specified address are read out at the data bus (D0 to D7). The read array mode is retained until another command is written. * Read Status Register Command (7016) When the command code "7016" is written in the first bus cycle, the contents of the status register are read out at the data bus (D0 to D7) by a read in the second bus cycle. The status register is explained in the next section. Start Write "4016" Write Read status register * Clear Status Register Command (5016) This command is used to clear the bits SR4 and SR5 of the status register after they have been set. These bits indicate that operation has ended in an error. To use this command, write the command code "5016" in the first bus cycle. * Program Command (4016) Program operation starts when the command code "4016 " is written in the first bus cycle. Then, if the address and data to program are written in the 2nd bus cycle, program operation (data programming and verification) will start. Whether the write operation is completed can be confirmed by read status register or the RY/BY status flag. To read the status register, write the read status register command "70 16". The status register bit 7 (SR7) is set to "0" at the same time the program starts and returned to "1" upon completion of the program. The read status mode remains active until the read array command ("FF16") is written. Write address Write data SR7 = "1"? or RY/BY = "1"? NO YES NO Program error SR4 = "0"? YES Program completed Fig 75. Program flowchart Table 17 List of software commands (CPU rewrite mode) First bus cycle Second bus cycle cycle number Mode Address Data (D0 to D7) Read array 1 Write X(4) FF16 Read status register 2 Write X 7016 Clear status register 1 Write X 5016 Command Mode Address Data (D0 to D7) Read X SRD(1) Program 2 Write X 4016 Write WA(2) WD(2) Block erase 2 Write X 2016 Write BA(3) D016 NOTES: 1. 2. 3. 4. SRD = Status Register Data WA = Write Address, WD = Write Data BA = Block Address to be erased (Input the maximum address of each block.) X denotes a given address in the User ROM area. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 76 of 131 38D2 Group * Block Erase Command (2016/D016) By writing the command code "2016" in the first bus cycle and the confirmation command code "D016" and the block address in the second bus cycle that follows, the block erase (erase and erase verify) operation starts for the block address of the flash memory to be specified. Whether the block erase operation is completed can be confirmed by read status register or the RY/BY status flag of flash memory control register. To read the status register, write the status register command "7016". The status register bit 7 (SR7) is set to "0" at the same time the block erase operation starts and returned to "1" upon completion of the block erase operation. The read status mode at this time remains active until the read array command ("FF16") is written. The RY/BY status flag register is set to "0" during block erase operation and "1" when the block erase operation is completed as is the status register bit 7 (SR7). After the block erase ends, erase results can be checked by reading the status register. For details, refer to the section where the status register is detailed. Start Write "2016" Write "D016" Block address Read status register SR7 = "1"? or RY/BY = "1"? NO YES SR5 = "0"? NO YES Erase completed (write read command "FF16") Fig 76. Erase flowchart Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 77 of 131 Erase error 38D2 Group * Status Register The status register shows the operating status of the flash memory and whether erase operations and programs ended successfully or in error. It can be read in the following ways: (1) By reading an arbitrary address from the User ROM area after writing the read status register command (7016) (2) By reading an arbitrary address from the User ROM area in the period from when the program starts or erase operation starts to when the read array command (FF16) is input. Also, the status register can be cleared by writing the clear status register command (5016). After reset, the status register is set to "8016". Table 18 shows the status register. Each bit in this register is explained below. * Sequencer status (SR7) The sequencer status indicates the operating status of the flash memory. This bit is set to "0" (busy) during write or erase operation and is set to "1" when these operations ends. After power-on, the sequencer status is set to "1" (ready). * Erase status (SR5) The erase status indicates the operating status of erase operation. If an erase error occurs, it is set to "1". When the erase status is cleared, it is reset to "0". * Program status (SR4) The program status indicates the operating status of write operation. When a write error occurs, it is set to "1". The program status is reset to "0" when it is cleared. If "1" is written for any of the SR5 and SR4 bits, the read array, program, and block erase commands are not accepted. Before executing these commands, execute the clear status register command (5016) and clear the status register. Also, if any commands are not correct, both SR5 and SR4 are set to "1". Table 18 Definition of each bit in status register Each bit of SRD bits Status name SR7 (bit7) SR6 (bit6) SR5 (bit5) SR4 (bit4) SR3 (bit3) SR2 (bit2) SR1 (bit1) SR0 (bit0) Sequencer status Reserved Erase status Program status Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 78 of 131 Definition "1" Ready - Terminated in error Terminated in error - - - - "0" Busy - Terminated normally Terminated normally - - - - 38D2 Group Full Status Check By performing full status check, it is possible to know the execution results of erase and program operations. Figure 77 shows a full status check flowchart and the action to be taken when each error occurs. Read status register SR4 = "1" YES and SR5 = "1"? Command sequence error Execute the clear status register command (5016) to clear the status register. Try performing the operation one more time after confirming that the command is entered correctly. NO SR5 = "0"? NO Block erase error Should an erase error occur, the block in error cannot be used. YES SR4 = "0"? NO Program error Should a program error occur, the block in error cannot be used. YES End (block erase, program) Note: When one of SR5 and SR4 is set to "1", none of the read array, program, and block erase commands is accepted. Execute the clear status register command (5016) before executing these commands. Fig 77. Full status check flowchart and remedial procedure for errors Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 79 of 131 38D2 Group Functions To Inhibit Rewriting Flash Memory Version To prevent the contents of internal flash memory from being read out or rewritten easily, this MCU incorporates a ROM code protect function for use in parallel I/O mode and an ID code check function for use in standard serial I/O mode. * ROM Code Protect Function The ROM code protect function is the function to inhibit reading out or modifying the contents of internal flash memory by using the ROM code protect control address (address FFDB 16 ) in parallel I/O mode. Figure 78 shows the ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16). (This address exists in the User ROM area.) If one or both of the pair of ROM code protect bits is set to "0", the ROM code protect is turned on, so that the contents of internal flash memory are protected against readout and modification. The ROM code protect is implemented in two levels. If level 2 is selected, the flash memory is protected even against readout by a shipment inspection LSI tester, etc. When an attempt is made to select both level 1 and level 2, level 2 is selected by default. If both of the two ROM code protect reset bits are set to "00", the ROM code protect is turned off, so that the contents of internal flash memory can be readout or modified. Once the ROM code protect is turned on, the contents of the ROM code protect reset bits cannot be modified in parallel I/O mode. Use standard serial I/O mode or other modes to rewrite the contents of the ROM code protect disable bits. Rewriting of only the ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16) cannot be performed. When rewriting the ROM code protect reset bit, rewrite the whole user ROM area (block 0) containing the ROM code protect control address. b0 b7 1 1 ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16) ROMCP (FF16 when shipped) Reserved bits ("1" at read/write) ROM code protect level 2 set bits (ROMCP2)(1, 2) b3b2 0 0: Protect enabled 0 1: Protect enabled 1 0: Protect enabled 1 1: Protect disabled ROM code protect reset bits (ROMCR)(3) b5b4 0 0: Protect removed 0 1: Protect set bits effective 1 0: Protect set bits effective 1 1: Protect set bits effective ROM code protect level 1 set bits (ROMCP1)(1) b7b6 0 0: Protect enabled 0 1: Protect enabled 1 0: Protect enabled 1 1: Protect disabled Notes 1: When ROM code protect is turned on, the internal flash memory is protected against readout or modification in parallel I/O mode. 2: When ROM code protect level 2 is turned on, ROM code readout by a shipment inspection LSI tester, etc. also is inhibited. 3: The ROM code protect reset bits can be used to turn off ROM code protect level 1 and ROM code protect level 2. However, no change can be made in parallel I/O mode. Use serial I/O mode or other modes to change settings. Fig 78. Structure of ROM code protect control address Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 80 of 131 38D2 Group * ID Code Check Function Use this function in standard serial I/O mode. When the contents of the flash memory are not blank, the ID code sent from the programmer is compared with the ID code written in the flash memory to see if they match. If the ID codes do not match, the commands sent from the programmer are not accepted. The ID code consists of 8-bit data, and its areas are FFD416 to FFDA16. Write a program which has had the ID code preset at these addresses to the flash memory. Address FFD416 ID1 FFD516 ID2 FFD616 ID3 FFD716 ID4 FFD816 ID5 FFD916 ID6 FFDA16 ID7 FFDB16 ROM code protect control Interrupt vector area Fig 79. ID code store addresses Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 81 of 131 38D2 Group Parallel I/O Mode The parallel I/O mode is used to input/output software commands, address and data in parallel for operation (read, program and erase) to internal flash memory. * User ROM and Boot ROM Areas In parallel I/O mode, the User ROM and Boot ROM areas shown in Figure 70 can be rewritten. Both areas of flash memory can be operated on in the same way. The Boot ROM area is 4 Kbytes in size and located at addresses F00016 through FFFF 16 . Make sure program and block erase operations are always performed within this address range. (Access to any location outside this address range is prohibited.) In the Boot ROM area, an erase block operation is applied to only one 4 K byte block. The boot ROM area has had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from the factory. Therefore, using the MCU in standard serial I/O mode, do not rewrite to the Boot ROM area. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 82 of 131 38D2 Group Standard serial I/O Mode The standard serial I/O mode inputs and outputs the software commands, addresses and data needed to operate (read, program, erase, etc.) the internal flash memory. This I/O is clock synchronized serial. This mode requires a purpose-specific peripheral unit. The standard serial I/O mode is different from the parallel I/O mode in that the CPU controls flash memory rewrite (uses the CPU rewrite mode), rewrite data input and so forth. The standard serial I/O mode is started by connecting "H" to the CNVSS pin and "H" to the P32 (BOOTENT) pin, and releasing the reset operation. (In the ordinary microcomputer mode, set CNVSS pin to "L" level.) This control program is written in the Boot ROM area when the product is shipped from Renesas. Accordingly, make note of the fact that the standard serial I/O mode cannot be used if the Boot ROM area is rewritten in parallel I/O mode. The standard serial I/ O mode has standard serial I/O mode 1 of the clock synchronous serial and standard serial I/O mode 2 of the clock asynchronous serial. Tables 19 and 20 show description of pin function (standard serial I/O mode). Figure 80 to 82 show the pin connections for the standard serial I/O mode. In standard serial I/O mode, only the User ROM area shown in Figure 70 can be rewritten. The Boot ROM area cannot be written. In standard serial I/O mode, a 7-byte ID code is used. When there is data in the flash memory, this function determines whether the ID code sent from the peripheral unit (programmer) and those written in the flash memory match. The commands sent from the peripheral unit (programmer) are not accepted unless the ID code matches. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 83 of 131 38D2 Group Table 19 Description of pin function (Flash Memory Standard Serial I/O Mode 1) Pin name VCC,VSS CNVSS RESET XIN XOUT AVSS VREF P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P34-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 P33 P32 P31 P30 Signal name Power supply CNVSS Reset input I/O I I I Function Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to the VCC pin and 0 V to the Vss pin. After input of port is set, input "H" level. Clock input Clock output Analog power supply input Reference voltage input I/O port I O Reset input pin. To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an "L" level for 16 cycles or more of XIN. Connect an oscillation circuit between the XIN and XOUT pins. As for the connection method, refer to the "clock generating circuit". I I/O Connect AVss to VSS. Apply reference voltage of A/D convertor to this pin. Input "L" or "H" level, or keep open. RxD input TxD output SCLK input BUSY output I O I O Serial data input pin. Serial data output pin. Serial clock input pin. BUSY signal output pin. Table 20 Description of pin function (Flash Memory Standard Serial I/O Mode 2) Pin name VCC,VSS CNVSS RESET XIN XOUT AVSS VREF P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P34-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 P33 P32 P31 P30 Signal name Power supply CNVSS Reset input I/O I I I Clock input Clock output Analog power supply input Reference voltage input I/O port I O Reset input pin. To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an "L" level for 16 cycles or more of XIN. Connect an oscillation circuit between the XIN and XOUT pins. As for the connection method, refer to the "clock generating circuit". I I/O Connect AVss to VSS. Apply reference voltage of A/D convertor to this pin. Input "L" or "H" level, or keep open. RxD input TxD output SCLK input BUSY output I O I O Serial data input pin. Serial data output pin. Input "L" level. BUSY signal output pin. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 84 of 131 Function Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to the Vcc pin and 0 V to the VSS pin. After input of port is set, input "H" level. P0 4/SEG 4 P0 5/SEG 5 P0 6/SEG 6 P0 7/SEG 7 P1 0/SEG 8 P1 1/SEG 9 P1 2/SEG 10 P1 3/SEG 11 P1 4/SEG 12 P1 5/SEG 13 P1 6/SEG 14 P1 7/SEG 15 P2 0/SEG 16 P2 1/SEG 17 P2 2/SEG 18 P2 3/SEG 19 38D2 Group 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 49 32 50 31 51 30 52 29 53 28 54 27 55 26 56 M38D29FFFP/HP 57 25 24 58 23 59 22 60 21 61 20 62 19 63 18 64 17 2 3 P4 5/AN 5 P4 4/AN 4 P4 3/AN 3 1 VPP RESET GND 4 5 6 7 8 P24/SEG20 P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 VL3 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 P30/SRDY2/(LED0) BUSY P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TXD2/(LED2) TxD P33/RXD2/(LED3) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 P4 2/AN 2/ADKEY P4 1/O OUT1/AN 1 P4 0/O OUT0 /AN 0 CNVSS RESET P6 2 /X COUT P6 1/X CIN V SS X IN X OUT V CC P6 0 /CNTR 1 P3 7/CNTR 0/T XOUT2/(LED 7) P03/SEG3/(KW7) P02/SEG2/(KW6) P01/SEG1/(KW5) P00/SEG0/(KW4) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P54/RXD1/(KW0) P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P51/INT1 P50/INT0 AVSS VREF P47/RTP1/AN7 P46/RTP0/AN6 * Vcc *Connect oscillation circuit. indicates flash memory pin. Package type: PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)/PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A) Fig 80. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 1 Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 85 of 131 SCLK RxD 38D2 Group Flash memory version 38D2 Group T_VDD Vcc T_VPP N.C. 4.7 k T_RXD P32 (TxD) T_TXD P33 (RxD) T_SCLK P31 (SCLK) CNVSS T_PGM/OE/MD 4.7 k T_BUSY P30 (BUSY) RESET circuit RESET T_RESET GND Vss AVss XIN XOUT Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. Note 1: For the programmer circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47pF. Fig 81. When using programmer (in standard serial I/O mode 1) of Suisei Electronics System Co., LTD, connection example Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 86 of 131 38D2 Group Flash memory version 38D2 Group Vcc Vcc CNVSS 4.7 k 4.7 k 4.7 k P32 (TxD) P33 (RxD) P31 (SCLK) P30 (BUSY) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RESET circuit *1 RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. * 1: Open-collector buffer Note 1: For the programmer circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47pF. Fig 82. When using E8 programmer (in standard serial I/O mode 1) connection example Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 87 of 131 38D2 Group Flash memory version td(CNVSS-RESET) td(P32-RESET) Power source RESET CNVSS P32(TXD) P31(SCLK) P30(BUSY) P33(RXD) Symbol Limits Min. Typ. Max. td(CNVSS-RESET) 0 - - td(P32-RESET) 0 Unit ms Notes: In the standard serial I/O mode 1, input "H" to the P31 pin. Be sure to set the CNVss pin to "H" before rising RESET. Be sure to set the P32 pin to "H" before rising RESET. ms Fig 83. Operating waveform for standard serial I/O mode 1 Flash memory version td(CNVSS-RESET) td(P32-RESET) Power source RESET CNVSS P32(TXD) P31(SCLK) P30(BUSY) P33(RXD) Symbol Limits Min. Typ. Max. td(CNVSS-RESET) 0 - - td(P32-RESET) 0 Unit ms Notes: In the standard serial I/O mode 2, input "H" to the P31 pin. Be sure to set the CNVss pin to "H" before rising RESET. Be sure to set the P32 pin to "H" before rising RESET. ms Fig 84. Operating waveform for standard serial I/O mode 2 Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 88 of 131 38D2 Group NOTES ON USE Processor Status Register The contents of the processor status register (PS) after a reset are undefined, except for the interrupt disable flag (I) which is "1". After a reset, initialize flags which affect program execution. In particular, it is essential to initialize the index X mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags because of their effect on calculations. Initialize these flags at biginning of the program. Interrupt The contents of the interrupt request bits do not change immediately after they have been written. After writing to an interrupt request register, execute at least one instruction before performing a BBC or BBS instruction. Decimal Calculations * To calculate in decimal notation, set the decimal mode flag (D) to "1", then execute an ADC or SBC instruction. After executing an ADC or SBC instruction, execute at least one instruction before executing a SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction. * In decimal mode, the values of the negative (N), overflow (V), and zero (Z) flags are invalid. Timers The division ratio is 1/(n+1) when the value n (0 to 255) is written to the timer latch. Multiplication and Division Instructions The index mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags do not affect the MUL and DIV instruction. The execution of these instructions does not change the contents of the processor status register. Direction Registers The values of the port direction registers cannot be read. This means, it is impossible to use the LDA instruction, memory operation instruction when the T flag is "1", addressing mode using direction register values as qualifiers, and bit test instructions such as BBC and BBS. It is also impossible to use bit operation instructions such as CLB and SEB, and read-modifywrite instructions to direction registers, including calculations such as ROR. To set the direction registers, use instructions such as LDM or STA. Serial Interface In clock synchronous serial I/O, if the receive side is using an external clock and it is to output the SRDY signal, set the transmit enable bit, the receive enable bit, and the SRDY output enable bit to "1". Serial I/O continues to output the final bit from the TXD pin after transmission is completed. A/D Converter The comparator is constructed linked to a capacitor. The conversion accuracy may be low because the charge is lost if the conversion speed is not enough. Accordingly, set f(XIN) to at least 500kHz during A/D conversion in the XIN mode. Also, do not execute the STP or WIT instruction during an A/D conversion. In the low-speed mode, since the A/D conversion is executed by the on-chip oscillator, the minimum value of f(XIN) frequency is not limited. LCD Drive Control Circuit Execution of the STP instruction sets the LCD enable bit (bit 3 of the LCD mode register) and bits 0 to 5 and bit 7 of the LCD power control register to "0" and the LCD panel turns off. To make the LCD panel turn on after returning from the stop mode, set these bits to "1". Instruction Execution Time The instruction execution time is obtained by multiplying the frequency of the internal clock by the number of cycles needed to execute an instruction. Power Source Voltage When the power source voltage value of a microcomputer is less than the value which is indicated as the recommended operating conditions, the microcomputer does not operate normally and may perform unstable operation. In a system where the power source voltage drops slowly when the power source voltage drops or the power supply is turned off, reset a microcomputer when the power source voltage is less than the recommended operating conditions and design a system not to cause errors to the system by this unstable operation. Handling of Power Source Pin In order to avoid a latch-up occurrence, connect a capacitor suitable for high frequencies as bypass capacitor between power source pin (VCC pin) and GND pin (Vss pin), and between power source pin (V CC pin) and analog power source pin (AVCC ). Besides, connect the capacitor to as close as possible. For bypass capacitor which should not be located too far from the pins to be connected, a ceramic capacitor of 0.1 F is recommended. LCD drive power supply Power supply capacitor may be insufficient with the division resistance for LCD power supply, and the characteristic of the LCD panel. In this case, there is the method of connecting the bypass capacitor about 0.1 - 0.33 F to V L1 - V L3 pins. The example of a strengthening measure of the LCD drive power supply is shown below. VL3 VL2 * Connect by the shortest possible wiring. * Connect the bypass capacitor to the VL1 -VL3 pins as short as possible. (Referential value:0.1-0.33 F) VL1 Fig. 85 Strengthening measure example of LCD drive power supply Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 89 of 131 38D2 Group NOTES ON QzROM VERSION Wiring to OSCSEL pin 1. OSCSEL = L Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the V SS pin of the microcomputer. 2. OSCSEL = H Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the VCC pattern which is supplied to the VCC pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the VCC could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the V CC pattern which is supplied to the V CC pin of the microcomputer. * Reason The OSCSEL pin is the power source input pin for the built-in QzROM. When programming in the QzROM, the impedance of the OSCSEL pin is low to allow the electric current for writing to flow into the built-in QzROM. Because of this, noise can enter easily. If noise enters the OSCSEL pin, abnormal instruction codes or data are read from the QzROM, which may cause a program runaway. Termination of OSCSEL pin (2) OSCSEL = H (1) OSCSEL = L (1) (1) The shortest The shortest VCC OSCSEL about 5 k about 5 k OSCSEL VSS (1) The shortest (1) Product shipped in blank As for the product shipped in blank, Renesas does not perform the writing test to user ROM area after the assembly process though the QzROM writing test is performed enough before the assembly process. Therefore, a writing error of approximate 0.1% may occur. Moreover, please note the contact of cables and foreign bodies on a socket, etc. because a writing environment may cause some writing errors. Notes On QzROM Writing Orders When ordering the QzROM product shipped after writing, submit the mask file (extension: .msk) which is made by the mask file converter MM. * Be sure to set the ROM option data* setup when making the mask file by using the mask file converter MM.. The ROM code protect is specified according to the ROM option data* in the mask file which is submitted at ordering. Note that the mask file which has nothing at the ROM option data* or has the data other than "00 16 ", "FE 16 " and "FF 16 " can not be accepted. * Set "FF16" to the ROM code protect address in ROM data regardless of the presence or absence of a protect. When data other than "FF16" is set, we may ask that the ROM data be submitted again. * ROM option data: mask option noted in MM Data Required For QzROM Writing Orders The following are necessary when ordering a QzROM product shipped after writing: 1. QzROM Writing Confirmation Form* 2. Mark Specification Form* 3. ROM data...........Mask file * For the QzROM writing confirmation form and the mark specification form, refer to the "Renesas Technology Corp." Homepage (http://www.renesas.com/homepage.jsp). Note that we cannot deal with special font marking (customer's trademark etc.) in QzROM microcomputer. The shortest QzROM Receive Flow When writing to QzROM is performed by user side, the receiving inspection by the following flow is necessary. Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin Fig. 86 Wiring for the OSCSEL pin Precautions Regarding Overvoltage in QzROM Version Make sure that voltage exceeding the VCC pin voltage is not applied to other pins. In particular, ensure that the state indicated by bold lines in figure below does not occur for OSCSEL pin (VPP power source pin for QzROM) during power-on or poweroff. Otherwise the contents of QzROM could be rewritten. QzROM product shipped after writing Renesas Renesas Programming Shipping Verify test Shipping 1.8V (1) QzROM product shipped in blank "protect disabled" "protect enabled to the protect area 1" User Receiving inspection (Blank check) User (2) 1.8V Receiving inspection of unprotected area (Verify test) Programming Programming to unprotected area Verify test for all area VCC pin voltage OSCSEL pin voltage "H" input OSCSEL pin voltage "L" input (1) Input voltage to other MCU pins rises before VCC pin voltage. (2) Input voltage to other MCU pins falls after VCC pin voltage. Note: The internal circuitry is unstable when VCC is below the minimum voltage specification of 1.8 V (shaded portion), so particular care should be exercised regarding overvoltage. Fig. 87 Example of Overvoltage Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 90 of 131 Verify test for unprotected area Fig. 88 QzROM receive flow 38D2 Group NOTES ON FLASH MEMORY VERSION CPU Rewrite Mode (1) Operation speed During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). (2) Instructions inhibited against use The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash memory cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode. (3) Interrupts inhibited against use The interrupts cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode because they refer to the internal data of the flash memory. (4) Watchdog timer In case of the watchdog timer has been running already, the internal reset generated by watchdog timer underflow does not happen, because of watchdog timer is always clearing during program or erase operation. (5) Reset Reset is always valid. In case of CNVSS = "H" when reset is released, boot mode is active. So the program starts from the address contained in address FFFC16 and FFFD16 in boot ROM area. CNVSS Pin The CNVSS pin determines the flash memory mode. Connect the CNVSS/VPP pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k. resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the V S S pin of the microcomputer. Note. When the boot mode or the standard serial I/O mode is used, a switch of the input level to the CNVSS pin is required. The shortest (1) CNVSS Approx. 5k VSS (1) The shortest Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin. Fig 89. Wiring for the CNVSS Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 91 of 131 NOTES ON DIFFERENCES BETWEEN QzROM VERSION AND FLASH MEMORY VERSION The QzROM version and flash memory versions differ in their manufacturing processes, built-in ROM, and layout patterns. Because of these differences, characteristic values, operation margins, noise immunity, and noise radiation and oscillation circuit constants may vary within the specified range of electrical characteristics. When switching to the QzROM version, implement system evaluations equivalent to those performed in the flash memory version. Confirm page 11 about the differences of functions. 38D2 Group Countermeasures against noise Noise (1) Shortest wiring length 1. Wiring for RESET pin Make the length of wiring which is connected to the RESET pin as short as possible. Especially, connect a capacitor across the RESET pin and the VSS pin with the shortest possible wiring (within 20 mm). * Reason The width of a pulse input into the RESET pin is determined by the timing necessary conditions. If noise having a shorter pulse width than the standard is input to the RESET pin, the reset is released before the internal state of the microcomputer is completely initialized. This may cause a program runaway. Noise Reset circuit RESET VSS VSS N.G. Reset circuit VSS XIN XOUT VSS N.G. XIN XOUT VSS O.K. Fig. 91 Wiring for clock I/O pins (2) Connection of bypass capacitor across VSS line and VCC line In order to stabilize the system operation and avoid the latch-up, connect an approximately 0.1 F bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line as follows: * Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin at equal length. * Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin with the shortest possible wiring. * Use lines with a larger diameter than other signal lines for VSS line and VCC line. * Connect the power source wiring via a bypass capacitor to the VSS pin and the VCC pin. RESET VSS VCC VCC VSS VSS O.K. Fig. 90 Wiring for the RESET pin 2. Wiring for clock input/output pins * Make the length of wiring which is connected to clock I/O pins as short as possible. * Make the length of wiring (within 20 mm) across the grounding lead of a capacitor which is connected to an oscillator and the VSS pin of a microcomputer as short as possible. * Separate the VSS pattern only for oscillation from other VSS patterns. * Reason If noise enters clock I/O pins, clock waveforms may be deformed. This may cause a program failure or program runaway. Also, if a potential difference is caused by the noise between the VSS level of a microcomputer and the VSS level of an oscillator, the correct clock will not be input in the microcomputer. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 92 of 131 N.G. O.K. Fig. 92 Bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line 38D2 Group (3) Oscillator concerns In order to obtain the stabilized operation clock on the user system and its condition, contact the oscillator manufacturer and select the oscillator and oscillation circuit constants. Be careful especially when range of voltage and temperature is wide. Also, take care to prevent an oscillator that generates clocks for a microcomputer operation from being affected by other signals. 1. Keeping oscillator away from large current signal lines Install a microcomputer (and especially an oscillator) as far as possible from signal lines where a current larger than the tolerance of current value flows. * Reason In the system using a microcomputer, there are signal lines for controlling motors, LEDs, and thermal heads or others. When a large current flows through those signal lines, strong noise occurs because of mutual inductance. 2. Installing oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently Install an oscillator and a connecting pattern of an oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently. Also, do not cross such signal lines over the clock lines or the signal lines which are sensitive to noise. * Reason Signal lines where potential levels change frequently (such as the CNTR pin signal line) may affect other lines at signal rising edge or falling edge. If such lines cross over a clock line, clock waveforms may be deformed, which causes a microcomputer failure or a program runaway. 1. Keeping oscillator away from large current signal lines Microcomputer Mutual inductance M XIN XOUT VSS Large current GND 2. Installing oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently Do not cross. CNTR XIN XOUT VSS N.G. Fig. 93 Wiring for a large current signal line/Wiring of signal lines where potential levels change frequently Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 93 of 131 (4) Analog input The analog input pin is connected to the capacitor of a voltage comparator. Accordingly, sufficient accuracy may not be obtained by the charge/discharge current at the time of A/D conversion when the analog signal source of high-impedance is connected to an analog input pin. In order to obtain the A/D conversion result stabilized more, please lower the impedance of an analog signal source, or add the smoothing capacitor to an analog input pin. (5) Difference of memory size When memory size differ in one group, actual values such as an electrical characteristics, A/D conversion accuracy, and the amount of proof of noise incorrect operation may differ from the ideal values. When these products are used switching, perform system evaluation for each product of every after confirming product specification. 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION QzROM VERSION ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 21 Absolute maximum ratings Symbol VCC VI VI VI VI VI VO VO VO VO Pd Topr Tstg Parameter Power source voltage Input voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50P57, P60-P62 Input voltage VL1 Input voltage VL2 Input voltage VL3 Input voltage RESET, XIN, OSCSEL Output voltage at output port P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 at segment port Output voltage COM0-COM3 Output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 Output voltage XOUT Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 94 of 131 Conditions Ratings -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VL2 All voltages are based on VSS. When an input voltage is measured, output transistors are cut off. VL1 to VL3 VL2 to 6.5 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VL3+0.3 -0.3 to VL3+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 Ta = 25C - - 300 -20 to 85 -40 to 125 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V mW C C 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Recommended Operating Conditions Table 22 Recommended operating conditions (1) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C unless otherwise noted) Symbol VCC Parameter Power source voltage (1) Frequency/2 mode (2) Frequency/4 mode Frequency/8 mode f(XIN) 12.5MHz f(XIN) 8.0MHz f(XIN) 4.0MHz f(XIN) 2.0MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8.0MHz f(XIN) 4.0MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8.0MHz f(XIN) 4.0MHz Low-speed mode On-chip oscillator mode VSS VL3 VREF AVSS VIA VIH VIH VIH VIH VIL VIL VIL VIL When start oscillating (3) Power source voltage LCD power source voltage A/D converter reference voltage Analog power source voltage Analog input voltage AN0-AN7 "H" input voltage P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 "H" input voltage P00-P03, P31, P33, , P34, P37, P50, 51, P54-P57, P60, P61 2.2V < VCC 5.5V "H" input voltage RESET VCC 2.2V "H" input voltage XIN "L" input voltage P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 "L" input voltage P00-P03, P31, P33, P34, P37, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60, P61, OSCSEL 2.2V < VCC 5.5V "L" input voltage RESET VCC 2.2V "L" input voltage XIN Min. 4.5 4.0 2.0 1.8 4.5 2.0 1.8 4.5 2.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 0.05 x f + 1.9 Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 0 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V AVSS 0.7VCC VCC VCC V V V V V V 0.8VCC VCC V 0.8VCC 2.5 2.0 5.5 VCC 0 65 x VCC-99 VCC - 100 0.8VCC 0 VCC VCC V V VCC 0.3VCC V V 0 0.2VCC V 0 0 0.2VCC 65 x VCC -99 100 0.2VCC V V 0 NOTES: Limits Typ. V 1. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 2. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. 3. The oscillation start voltage and the oscillation start time differ depending on factors such as the oscillator, circuit constants, and operating temperature range. Note that oscillation start may be particularly difficult at low voltage when using a high-frequency oscillator. f: Oscillation frequency (1 MHz f(XIN) 8 MHz) of oscillator. When the 8 MHz oscillation is used, assign "8" to "f". Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 95 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Table 23 Recommended operating conditions (3) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Min. Limits Typ. Max. -40 Unit IOH(peak) "H" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 IOH(peak) "H" total peak output current (1) P40-47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -40 mA IOL(peak) "L" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 40 mA IOL(peak) "L" total peak output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 40 mA IOL(peak) "L" total peak output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 110 mA IOH(avg) "H" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 -20 mA IOH(avg) "H" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -20 mA IOL(avg) "L" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 20 mA IOL(avg) "L" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 20 mA IOL(avg) "L" total average output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 90 mA IOH(peak) "H" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 -2.0 mA IOH(peak) "H" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -5.0 mA IOL(peak) "L" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 5.0 mA IOL(peak) "L" peak output current (2) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 10 mA IOL(peak) "L" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P52, P53 30 mA IOH(avg) "H" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 -1.0 mA IOH(avg) "H" average output current (3) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -2.5 mA IOL(avg) "L" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 2.5 mA IOL(avg) "L" average output current (3) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 5.0 mA IOL(avg) "L" average output current (3) P30-P37, P52, P53 15 mA NOTES: mA 1. The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents. 2. The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port. 3. The average output current is average value measured over 100 ms. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 96 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Table 24 Recommended operating conditions (4) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter f(CNTR0) f(CNTR1) Timer X and Timer Y Input frequency (duty cycle 50%) f(Tclk) Timer X, Timer Y, Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3, Timer 4 clock input frequency (Count source frequency of each timer) f() System clock frequency (1) f(XIN) Main clock input frequency (duty cycle 50%) (2)(3) f(XCIN) Sub-clock oscillation frequency (duty cycle 50%)(4)(5) Conditions 4.5 VCC 5.5V 4.0 VCC < 4.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.0V VCC < 2.0V 4.5 VCC 5.5V 4.0 VCC < 4.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.0V VCC < 2.0V 4.5 VCC 5.5V 4.0 VCC < 4.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.0V VCC < 2.0V 4.5 VCC 5.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.5V VCC < 2.0V Limits Typ. Min. 1.0 1.0 1.0 32.768 Max. 6.25 2 x Vcc -4 Vcc 5 x Vcc -8 16 4 x Vcc -8 2 x Vcc 10 x Vcc -16 6.25 4 Vcc 5 x Vcc -8 16 8.0 20 x Vcc -32 80 Unit MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz kHz NOTES: Relationship between system clock frequency and power source voltage is shown in the graph below. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. The oscillation start voltage and the oscillation start time differ depending on factors such as the oscillator, circuit constants, and operation temperature range. Note that oscillation start may be particularly difficult at low voltage when using a high-frequency oscillator. 5. When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, set the clock input oscillation frequency on condition that f(XCIN) < f(XIN)/3. 1. 2. 3. 4.
[MHz] 16 Main clock X IN frequency System clock frequency [MHz] 6.25 4.0 2.0 8.0 4.0 1.0 0 1.8 2.0 4.0 4.5 Power source voltage 5.5 [V] 1.0 0 1.8 2.0 4.5 Power source voltage Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 97 of 131 5.5 [V] 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Electrical Characteristics Table 25 Electrical characteristics (1) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter VOH "H" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 VOH "H" output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 (1) VOL "L" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 VOL "L" output voltage P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P61 (1) VOL "L" output voltage P30-P37, P52, P53 VT+ - VT- Hysteresis CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0-INT2, KW0-KW7 Hysteresis RXD1, RXD2, SCLK1, SCLK2 Hysteresis RESET VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT- Test conditions IOH= -2.5mA IOH= -0.6mA VCC=2.5V IOH= -5mA IOH= -1.25mA IOH= -1.25mA VCC=2.5V IOL=5mA IOL=1.25mA IOL=1.25mA VCC=2.5V IOL=10mA IOL=2.5mA IOL=2.5mA VCC=2.5V IOL=15mA IOL=3.0mA VCC=2.5V Min. VCC-2.0 VCC-1.0 Limits Typ. Max. V VCC-2.0 VCC-0.5 VCC-1.0 VCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V on RESET Unit V 2.0 0.5 1.0 V 2.0 0.5 1.0 V 2.0 0.8 V 0.5 V 0.5 V 0.5 V IIH "H" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 VI=VCC 5.0 A IIH "H" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 VI=VCC 5.0 A IIH "H" input current RESET, OSCSEL VI=VCC 5.0 A IIH "H" input current XIN VI=VCC IIL "L" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 VI=VSS Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS IIL "L" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60- P62 IIL "L" input current RESET, OSCSEL IIL "L" input current XIN On-chip oscillator frequency f(OCO) NOTE: -60 -25 -120 -50 -30 -6.5 -70 -25 -5.0 -240 -100 -5.0 -140 -45 -5.0 -4.0 VI=VSS VCC=5.0V, Ta =25C A 4.0 2500 5000 A A A A A A A A 7500 kHz 1. When the port Xc switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register is "1", the drivability of P62 is different from the above. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 98 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Table 26 Electrical characteristics (2) (Vcc = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz, output transistors in the cut-off state, A/D converter stopped, unless otherwise noted) Symbol VRAM ICC Parameter Test conditions RAM hold voltage Power source current When clock is stopped Frequency/2 mode VCC=5.0V VCC=2.5V Frequency/4 mode VCC=5.0V VCC=2.5V Frequency/8 mode VCC=5.0V VCC=2.5V Low-speed mode VCC=5.0V VCC=2.5V On-chip oscillator mode f(XIN), f(XCIN) = stop All oscillations stopped (in STP state) Current increased at A/D converter operating Min. 1.8 f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=2MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=stop in WIT state f(XIN)=stop in WIT state VCC=5.0V VCC=2.5V VCC=2.5V (in WIT state) Ta=25C Limits Typ. 6.4 1.5 2.2 0.6 0.3 0.4 3.5 1.5 1.5 0.8 0.3 0.5 2.5 1.5 1.2 0.5 0.3 0.3 17 5.5 7.0 3.5 270 35 25 0.1 1.0 A 10 A Ta=85C f(XIN)=12.5 MHz, VCC=5 V in frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode f(XIN)= stop, VCC = 5 V in on-chip oscillator operating f(XIN) = stop, VCC = 5 V in low-speed mode Unit Max. 5.5 13 3.0 3.0 1.2 0.6 0.8 10 3.0 2.5 2.5 0.6 1.0 5.0 3.0 1.6 1.0 0.6 0.6 26 11 14 7.0 540 90 75 V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA A A A A A A A 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.4 mA A/D Converter Characteristics Table 27 A/D converter recommended operating condition (Vcc = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter VCC VIH Power source voltage VIL "L" input voltage ADKEY f(AD) AD converter clock frequency (1) (Low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode excluded) Test conditions "H" input voltage ADKEY NOTE: 0 4.5V < VCC 5.5V 4.0V < VCC 4.5V 2.0V < VCC 4.0V 1. Confirm the recommended operating condition for main clock input frequency. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 99 of 131 Min. 2.0 0.9VCC Limits Typ. 5.0 Max. 5.5 VCC Unit V V 0.7 x VCC-0.5 V 6.25 4.0 VCC MHz MHz MHz 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Table 28 A/D converter characteristics (Vcc = 2.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode included, unless otherwise noted) Symbol - ABS tCONV RLADDER IVREF IIA Parameter Test conditions Min. Resolution Absolute accuracy 10bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 6.25MHz (quantification error mode excluded) 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 4MHz 2.2V VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 VccMHz 2.0V VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 8bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 6.25MHz mode 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 4MHz 2.2V < VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 VccMHz 2.0V VCC 2.2V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 (6Vcc-11)MHz 2.0V VCC 2.2V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/8 VccMHz 2.0V VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 Conversion time(1) 10bitAD mode 8bitAD mode Ladder resistor Reference input VREF=5.0V current Analog input current Limits Typ. Max. 10 4 Unit Bits LSB 2 tc(AD)x61 tc(AD)x49 12 50 35 150 tc(AD)x62 tc(AD)x50 100 200 k A 5.0 A NOTES: s 1. tc(AD): one cycle of AD conversion clock. AD conversion clock can be selected from SOURCE/2 or SOURCE/8. SOURCE represents the XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode and internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode or the low-speed mode. When the A/D conversion is executed in the frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 mode, or frequency/8 mode, set f(XIN) 500 kHz. Relationship among AD conversion clock frequency, power source voltage, AD conversion mode and absolute accuracy. AD conversion clock frequency 10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB [MHz] 6.25 4.0 f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 8bitAD=2LSB 1.0 (Note) 0 AD conversion clock *frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 and frequency/8 mode: f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 f(XIN)/8 8bitAD=2LSB 2.2 2.0 1.8 2.0 2.2 4.0 4.5 Power source voltage V CC Note: f(XIN) 500kHz Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 AD conversion clock *Low-speed mode and on-chip oscillator mode: f(OCO)/8 or f(OCO)/32 Page 100 of 131 5.5 [V] 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION LCD power supply characteristics Table 29 LCD power supply characteristics (when connecting division resistors for LCD power supply) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol RLCD Parameter Division resister for LCD power supply (1) Test conditions RSEL="10" RSEL="11" LCD drive timing A LCD drive timing B LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00" NOTE: 1. The value is the average of each one division resistor. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 101 of 131 Min. Limits Typ. 200 5 120 90 150 120 170 150 190 170 150 120 170 150 190 170 190 190 Max. Unit k 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Timing Requirements and Switching Characteristics Table 30 Timing requirements (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter tW(RESET) tC(XIN) Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time 4.5V VCC 5.5V (1) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V tWH(XIN) Main clock input "H" pulse width 4.5V VCC 5.5V 4.0V VCC < 4.5V tWL(XIN) Main clock input "L" pulse width 4.5V VCC 5.5V (2) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) tsu(RXD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RXD) Min. 2 62.5 Limits Typ. Max. Unit s ns 125 25 ns ns 50 25 ns ns 50 250 105 105 80 80 800 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width (3) 370 ns (3) 370 ns 220 100 ns ns (2) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time (3) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time NOTES: 1. 80 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 2. 32 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 3. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "0" (UART). Table 31 Timing requirements (2) (VCC = 1.8 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tW(RESET) tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) tC(CNTR) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) 2.0V VCC 4.0V VCC < 2.0V 2.0V VCC 4.0V VCC < 2.0V Main clock input "L" pulse width 2.0V VCC 4.0V VCC < 2.0V CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time 2.0V VCC 4.0V VCC < 2.0V Main clock input "H" pulse width Min. 2 125 Limits Typ. Max. Unit s ns 166 ns 50 ns 70 ns 50 ns 70 ns 1000/VCC ns 1000/(5 x VCC-8) ns tc(CNTR)/2-20 tc(CNTR)/2-20 230 230 2000 ns ns ns ns ns tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width tWH(SCLK) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width (1) 950 ns tWL(SCLK) (1) 950 ns 400 200 ns ns tsu(RXD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RXD) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time NOTE: 1. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F are "0" (UART). Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 102 of 131 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION Table 32 Switching characteristics (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) td(SCLK-TxD) Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width tv(SCLK-TxD) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time tr(SCLK) tf(SCLK) Min. tc(SCLK)/2-30 tc(SCLK)/2-30 Limits Typ Max. Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) Unit 140 ns ns ns 30 30 ns ns -30 ns NOTE: 1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [001F16]) of UART control register is "0". Table 33 Switching characteristics (2) (VCC = 1.8 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) td(SCLK-TxD) tv(SCLK-TxD) tr(SCLK) tf(SCLK) Min. tc(SCLK)/2-80 tc(SCLK)/2-80 Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width Limits Typ Max. Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) 350 ns ns ns 80 80 ns ns -30 (1) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time ns NOTE: 1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [001F16]) of UART control register is "0". 1k Measurement output pin Measurement output pin 100pF CMOS output 100pF N-channel open-drain output (Note) Note: When bit 4 of the UART control register (address 001B16 [address 0FF116]) is "1." (N-channel open-drain output mode) Fig 94. Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 103 of 131 Unit 38D2 Group QzROM VERSION tC(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) CNTR0, CNTR1 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tWH(INT) INT0-INT2 tWL(INT) 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tW(RESET) RESET 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tC(XIN) tWL(XIN) tWH(XIN) 0.8VCC XIN 0.2VCC tC(SCLK) SCLK1 SCLK2 tf tWL(SCLK) tWH(SCLK) 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tsu(RXD-SCLK) RXD1 RXD2 th(SCLK-RXD) 0.8VCC 0.2VCC td(SCLK-TXD) TXD1 TXD2 Fig 95. Timing diagram Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 tr Page 104 of 131 tV(SCLK-TXD) 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION FLASH MEMORY VERSION ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 34 Absolute maximum ratings Symbol VCC VI Parameter Power source voltage Input voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 Ratings -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 Unit V V VI Input voltage VL1 -0.3 to VL2 V VL1 to VL3 V VI Input voltage VL2 VI Input voltage VL3 VI Input voltage VO Output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 RESET, XIN, CNVSS At output port Conditions All voltages are based on VSS. When an input voltage is measured, output transistors are cut off. At segment output COM0-COM3 VL2 to 6.5 V -0.3 to VCC+0.3 V -0.3 to VCC+0.3 V -0.3 to VL3+0.3 V -0.3 to VL3+0.3 V VO Output voltage VO Output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 V VO Output voltage -0.3 to VCC+0.3 V Pd Topr Tstg Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature 300 -20 to 85 -40 to 125 mW C C Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 XOUT Page 105 of 131 Ta=25C - - 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Recommended Operating Conditions Table 35 Recommended operating conditions (1) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C unless otherwise noted) Symbol VCC Parameter Power source voltage(1) Frequency/2 mode (2) Frequency/4 mode Frequency/8 mode f(XIN) 12.5MHz f(XIN) 8MHz f(XIN) 4MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8MHz Min. 4.5 4.0 2.7 4.5 2.7 4.5 Limits Typ. VCC VCC P00-P03, P31, P33, P34, P37, P50, P51, P54- P57, P60, P61 0.8VCC VCC V RESET XIN 0.8VCC VCC V 0.8VCC 0 VCC 0.3VCC V V P00-P03, P31, P33, P34, P37, P50, P51, P54- P57, P60, P61, CNVSS 0 0.2VCC V RESET XIN 0 0.2VCC V 0 0.2VCC V Power source voltage LCD power source voltage A/D converter reference voltage Analog power source voltage Analog input voltage AN0-AN7 "H" input voltage P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 VIH "H" input voltage VIH "H" input voltage VIH VIL "H" input voltage "L" input voltage VIL "L" input voltage VIL "L" input voltage VIL "L" input voltage P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 0 2.5 2.7 1. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 2. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. Page 106 of 131 5.5 VCC 0 NOTES: Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 V V V V V V AVSS 0.7VCC VSS VL3 VREF AVSS VIA VIH 5.5 5.5 5.5 Unit V V V V V V V V V Low-speed mode On-chip oscillator mode 2.7 2.7 2.7 Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Table 36 Recommended operating conditions (3) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Min. Limits Typ. Max. -40 Unit IOH(peak) "H" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 IOH(peak) "H" total peak output current (1) P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -40 mA IOL(peak) "L" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 40 mA IOL(peak) "L" total peak output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 40 mA IOL(peak) "L" total peak output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 110 mA IOH(avg) "H" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 -20 mA IOH(avg) "H" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -20 mA IOL(avg) "L" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 20 mA IOL(avg) "L" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P61 20 mA IOL(avg) "L" total average output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 90 mA IOH(peak) "H" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 -2.0 mA IOH(peak) "H" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P62-P62 -5.0 mA IOL(peak) "L" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 5.0 mA IOL(peak) "L" peak output current (2) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 10 mA IOL(peak) "L" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P52, P53 30 mA IOH(avg) "H" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 -1.0 mA IOH(avg) "H" average output current (3) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 -2.5 mA IOL(avg) "L" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 2.5 mA IOL(avg) "L" average output current (3) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 5.0 mA IOL(avg) "L" average output current (3) P30-P37, P52, P53 15 mA mA NOTES: 1. The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents. 2. The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port. 3. The average output current is average value measured over 100 ms. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 107 of 131 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Table 37 Recommended operating conditions (4) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol f(CNTR0) f(CNTR1) Parameter Limits Conditions Timer X and Timer Y Input frequency (duty cycle 50%) Min. Typ. Max. 4.5V VCC 5.5V 6.25 4.0V VCC < 4.5V 2xVcc-4 MHz 2.7V VCC < 4.0V Vcc MHz Timer X, Timer Y, Timer 1, Timer 2, 4.5V VCC 5.5V Timer 3, Timer 4 clock input frequency 4.0V VCC < 4.5V (Count source frequency of each timer) 2.7V VCC < 4.0V f(Tclk) f() f(XIN) Main clock input frequency (duty cycle 50%) (2)(3) f(XCIN) Sub-clock oscillation frequency MHz 16 MHz 4xVcc-8 MHz 2xVcc MHz 6.25 MHz 4.0V VCC < 4.5V 4 MHz 2.7V VCC < 4.0V Vcc MHz 4.5V VCC 5.5V System clock frequency (1) Unit 4.5V VCC 5.5V 1.0 16 MHz 2.7V VCC < 4.5V 1.0 8.0 MHz 80 kHz (duty cycle 50%) 32.768 (4)(5) NOTES: Relationship between system clock frequency and power source voltage is shown in the graph below. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. The oscillation start voltage and the oscillation start time differ depending on factors such as the oscillator, circuit constants, and operating temperature range. Note that oscillation start may be particularly difficult at low voltage when using a high-frequency oscillator. 5. When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, set the clock input oscillation frequency on condition that f(XCIN) < f(XIN)/3. 1. 2. 3. 4.
[MHz] 16 [MHz] Main clock XIN frequency System clock frequency 6.25 4.0 2.7 8.0 1.0 0 4.0 2.7 4.5 Power source voltage 5.5 [V] 0 2.7 4.5 Power source voltage Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 108 of 131 5.5 [V] 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Electrical Characteristics Table 38 Electrical characteristics (1) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Test conditions Limits Typ. VOH "H" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 IOH= -2.5mA VOH "H" output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60- P62(1) IOH= -5mA IOH= -1.25mA VCC-2.0 VCC-0.5 VOL "L" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" output voltage P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60- P62(1) 2.0 0.5 2.0 0.5 V VOL IOL=5mA IOL=1.25mA IOL=10mA IOL=2.5mA VOL "L" output voltage P30-P37, P52, P53 Hysteresis CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0-INT2, KW0- KW7 Hysteresis RxD1, RxD2, SCLK1, SCLK2 IOL=15mA 2.0 V VT+-VT- VT+-VT- VT+-VT- Hysteresis RESET Max. Unit Min. VCC-2.0 V V V V 0.5 V 0.5 V 0.5 V IIH "H" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 VI=VCC 5.0 A IIH 5.0 A IIH VI=VCC "H" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 VI=VCC "H" input current RESET, CNVSS 5.0 A IIH "H" input current XIN VI=VCC IIL "L" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 IIL "L" input current RESET, CNVSS VI=VSS Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS IIL "L" input current XIN VI=VSS f(OCO) On-chip oscillator frequency IIL "L" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67 VCC=5V, Ta=25C A 4.0 -5.0 -60 -120 -240 -25 -50 -100 -5.0 -30 -70 -140 -6.5 -25 -45 5000 A A A A A -5.0 A 7500 kHz -4.0 2500 A A NOTE: 1. When the port Xc switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register is "1", the drivability of P62 is different from the above. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 109 of 131 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Table 39 Electrical characteristics (2) (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz, output transistors in the cut-off state, A/D converter stopped, unless otherwise noted) Symbol VRAM ICC Parameter RAM hold voltage Power source current Test conditions When clock is stopped Frequency/2 mode Vcc=5.0V Vcc=2.7V Frequency/4 mode Vcc=5.0V Vcc=2.7V Frequency/8 mode Vcc=5.0V Vcc=2.7V Low-speed mode Vcc=5.0V Limits Typ. Min. 2.2 f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=2MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=stop in WIT state Ta=25C 4.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 3.2 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.0 1.0 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.0 400 4.0 Ta=85C Vcc=2.7V On-chip oscillator mode f(XIN), f(XCIN): stop All oscillations are stopped (in STP state) Current increased at A/D converter operating f(XIN)=stop in WIT state 300 3.7 Ta=25C Ta=85C Vcc=5.0V Vcc=2.7V Vcc=2.7V (in WIT state) Ta=25C Ta=85C f(XIN)=12.5MHz, VCC=5V in frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode f(XIN)=stop, VCC=5V in on-chip oscillator operating f(XIN)=stop, VCC=5V in low-speed mode 600 500 500 0.6 1.0 1.0 Max. 5.5 7.0 3.5 3.5 3 2.5 2.5 5.6 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.5 2.5 5 3 3 3 2.5 2.5 800 10 20 600 9 18 1200 1000 1000 3.0 Unit V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA A A A A A A A A A mA 1.0 mA 0.8 mA A/D Converter Characteristics Table 40 A/D converter recommended operating condition (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Test conditions VCC Power source voltage VIH "H" input voltage ADKEY VIL "L" input voltage ADKEY f(AD) AD converter clock frequency (1) (Low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode excluded) Limits Min. Typ. 2.7 5.0 5.5 V VCC V 0 0.7 x VCC - 0.5 V 6.25 4.0 VCC MHz MHz MHz 4.5V < VCC 5.5V 4.0V < VCC 4.5V 2.7V < VCC 4.0V 1. Confirm the recommended operating condition for main clock input frequency. Page 110 of 131 Unit 0.9VCC NOTE: Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Max. 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Table 41 A/D converter characteristics (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode included, unless otherwise noted) Symbol - ABS tCONV RLADDER IVREF IIA Parameter Test conditions Min. Resolution Absolute accuracy 10bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/86.25MHz (quantification error mode excluded) 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/84MHz 2.7V VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8VccMHz 2.7V VCC 5.5V, f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 8bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/86.25MHz mode 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/84MHz 2.7V VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8VccMHz 2.7V VCC 5.5V, f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 Conversion time(1) 10bitAD mode 8bitAD mode Ladder resistor Reference input VREF=5V current Analog input current Limits Typ. Max. 10 4 Unit Bits LSB 2 tc(AD) x 61 tc(AD) x 49 12 50 35 150 tc(AD) x 62 tc(AD) x 50 100 200 s k A 5.0 A NOTES: 1. tc(AD): one cycle of AD conversion clock. AD conversion clock can be selected from SOURCE/2 or SOURCE/8. SOURCE represents the XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode and internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode or the low-speed mode. When the A/D conversion is executed in the frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 mode, or frequency/8 mode, set f(XIN) 500 kHz. Relationship among AD conversion clock frequency, power source voltage, AD conversion mode and absolute accuracy. 10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB AD conversion clock * Low-speed mode and on-chip oscillator mode: f(OCO)/8 or f(OCO)/32 AD conversion clock frequency [MHz] 6.25 4.0 AD conversion clock * frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 and frequency/8 mode: f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 2.7 f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB (Note) 0 2.7 4.0 4.5 Power source voltage VCC Note: f(XIN) 500kHz Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 111 of 131 5.5 [V] 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION LCD power supply characteristics Table 42 LCD power supply characteristics (when connecting division resistors for LCD power supply) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol RLCD Parameter Division resister for LCD power supply (1) Test conditions RSEL="10" RSEL="11" LCD drive timing A LCD drive timing B LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00" NOTE: 1. The value is the average of each one division resistor. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 112 of 131 Min. Limits Typ. 200 5 120 90 150 120 170 150 190 170 150 120 170 150 190 170 190 190 Max. Unit k 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Timing Requirements And Switching Characteristics Table 43 Power supply circuit characteristics (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol td(P-R) Parameter Test conditions Internal power source voltage stabilizes time at power-on 2.7 VCC 5.5V Limits Typ. Min. 2 Unit Max. ms Table 44 Timing requirements (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter tW(RESET) tC(XIN) Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time tWH(XIN) Main clock input "H" pulse width 4.5V VCC 5.5V (2) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V tWL(XIN) Main clock input "L" pulse width 4.5V VCC 5.5V (2) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width Min. 2 62.5 4.5V VCC 5.5V (1) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V Limits Typ. Max. Unit s ns 125 25 ns ns 50 25 ns ns Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time (3) 50 250 105 105 80 80 800 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns tWH(SCLK) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width (3) 370 ns tWL(SCLK) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width (3) Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time 370 ns 220 100 ns ns tsu(RxD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RxD) NOTES: 1. 80 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 2. 32 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 3. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "0" (UART). Table 45 Timing requirements (2) (VCC = 2.7 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tW(RESET) tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) tsu(RXD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RXD) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time NOTE: 1. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "0" (UART). Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 113 of 131 Limits Min. Typ. 2 125 50 50 1000/VCC tc(CNTR)/2-20 tc(CNTR)/2-20 230 230 2000 950 950 400 200 Max. Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION Table 46 Switching characteristics (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter tWH (SCLK) tWL (SCLK) td (SCLK-TXD) Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width tV (SCLK-TXD) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time tr (SCLK) tf (SCLK) Min. tC(SCLK)/2-30 tC(SCLK)/2-30 Limits Typ Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) Max. Unit 140 ns ns ns 30 30 ns ns -30 ns NOTE: 1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [0FF116]) of UART control register is "0". Table 47 Switching characteristics (2) (VCC = 2.7 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tWH (SCLK) tWL (SCLK) td (SCLK-TXD) tV (SCLK-TXD) tr (SCLK) tf (SCLK) Limits Parameter Min. tC(SCLK)/2-80 tC(SCLK)/2-80 Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width Typ Max. 350 Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) -30 (1) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time 80 80 1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [0FF116]) of UART control register is "0". 1k Measurement output pin 100pF 100pF N-channel open-drain output (Note) CMOS output Note: When bit 4 of the UART control register (address 001B16 [address 0FF116]) is "1." (N-channel open-drain output mode) Fig 96. Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 114 of 131 ns ns ns ns NOTE: Measurement output pin Unit ns ns 38D2 Group FLASH MEMORY VERSION tc(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) 0.8VCC CNTR0, CNTR1 0.2VCC tWL(INT) tWH(INT) INT0-INT2 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tw(RESET) RESET 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tc(XIN) tWL(XIN) tWH(XIN) 0.8VCC 0.2VCC XIN tC(SCLK) tf SCLK1 SCLK2 tr tWL(SCLK) 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tsu(RXD-SCLK) R XD1 R XD2 th(SCLK-RXD) 0.8VCC 0.2VCC td(SCLK-TXD) T XD 1 T XD 2 Fig 97. Timing diagram (in single-chip mode) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 tWH(SCLK) Page 115 of 131 tV(SCLK-TXD) 38D2 Group PACKAGE OUTLINE Diagrams showing the latest package dimensions and mounting information are available in the "Packages" section of the Renesas Technology website. JEITA Package Code P-LQFP64-14x14-0.80 RENESAS Code PLQP0064GA-A Previous Code 64P6U-A MASS[Typ.] 0.7g HD *1 D 33 48 49 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. 2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. 32 bp c Reference Dimension in Millimeters Symbol *2 E HE c1 b1 ZE Terminal cross section 64 17 c Index mark A2 16 ZD A 1 A1 F L D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 L1 y e Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 *3 Detail F bp x Page 116 of 131 e x y ZD ZE L L1 Min Nom Max 13.9 14.0 14.1 13.9 14.0 14.1 1.4 15.8 16.0 16.2 15.8 16.0 16.2 1.7 0.1 0.2 0 0.32 0.37 0.42 0.35 0.09 0.145 0.20 0.125 8 0 0.8 0.20 0.10 1.0 1.0 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 38D2 Group JEITA Package Code P-LQFP64-10x10-0.50 RENESAS Code PLQP0064KB-A Previous Code 64P6Q-A / FP-64K / FP-64KV MASS[Typ.] 0.3g HD *1 D 48 33 49 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. 2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. 32 bp 64 1 c1 Terminal cross section ZE 17 Reference Dimension in Millimeters Symbol c E *2 HE b1 16 Index mark ZD c A *3 A1 y e A2 F bp L x L1 Detail F Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 117 of 131 D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 e x y ZD ZE L L1 Min Nom Max 9.9 10.0 10.1 9.9 10.0 10.1 1.4 11.8 12.0 12.2 11.8 12.0 12.2 1.7 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.18 0.09 0.145 0.20 0.125 8 0 0.5 0.08 0.08 1.25 1.25 0.35 0.5 0.65 1.0 38D2 Group APPENDIX Note on Programming 1. Processor Status Register (1) Initialization of the processor status register It is required to initialize the processor status register (PS) flags which affect program execution. It is particularly essential to initialize the T and D flags because of their effect on calculations. Initialize these flags at the beginning of the program. At a reset, the contents of the processor status register (PS) are undefined except for the I flag which is "1". 2. Decimal Calculations (1) Instructions for decimal calculations To perform decimal calculations, set the decimal mode (D) flag to "1" with the SED instruction and execute the ADC or SBC instruction. In that case, after the ADC or SBC instruction, execute another instruction before the SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction. Set the decimal mode (D) flag to "1" Execute the ADC or SBC instruction Reset NOP Initialize the flags Execute the SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction Main program Fig. 98 Initialization of processor status register flags (2) How to refer the processor status register To refer the contents of the processor status register (PS), execute the PHP instruction once and then read the contents of (S+1). If necessary, execute the PLP instruction to return the stored PS to its original status. (S) (S) + 1 Stored PS Fig. 99 Stack memory contents after PHP instruction execution Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 118 of 131 Fig. 100 Instructions for decimal calculations (2) Status flag at decimal calculations When the ADC or SBC instruction is executed in decimal mode (D flag = "1"), three of the status flags (N, V, and Z) are disabled. The carry (C) flag is set to "1" if a carry is generated and is cleared to "0" if a borrow is generated as a result of a calculation, so it can be used to determine whether the calculation has generated a carry or borrow. Initialize the C flag before each calculation. 38D2 Group 3. JMP Instruction When using the JMP instruction (indirect addressing mode), do not specify the address where "FF16" is allocated to the loworder 8 bits as the operand. 4. Multiplication and Division Instructions (1) The MUL and DIV instructions are not affected by the T and D flags. (2) Executing these instructions does not change the contents of the processor status register. 5. Read-Modify-Write Instruction Do not execute any read-modify-write instruction to the read invalid (address) SFR. The read-modify-write instruction reads 1-byte of data from memory, modifies the data, and writes 1-byte the data to the original memory. In the 740 Family, the read-modify-write instructions are the following: (1) Bit handling instructions: CLB, SEB (2) Shift and rotate instructions: ASL, LSR, ROL, ROR, RRF (3) Add and subtract instructions: DEC, INC (4) Logical operation instructions (1's complement): COM Although not the read-modify-write instructions, add and subtract/logical operation instructions (ADC, SBC, AND, EOR, and ORA) when T flag = "1" operate in the way as the readmodify-write instruction. Do not execute them to the read invalid SFR. When the read-modify-write instruction is executed to the read invalid SFR, the following may result: As reading is invalid, the read value is undefined. The instruction modifies this undefined value and writes it back, so the written value will be indeterminate. Notes on Peripheral Functions Notes on I/O Ports 1. Use in Stand-By State When using the MCU in stand-by state* 1 for low-power consumption, do not leave the input level of an I/O port undefined. Be especially careful to the I/O ports for the Nchannel open-drain. In this case, pull-up (connect to Vcc) or pull-down (connect to Vss) these ports through a resistor. When determining a resistance value, note the following: * External circuit * Variation in the output level during ordinary operation When using a built-in pull-up resistor, note variations in current values: * When setting as an input port: Fix the input level * When setting as an output port: Prevent current from flowing out externally. Even if a port is set to output by the direction register, when the content of the port latch is "1", the transistor becomes the OFF state, which allows the port to be in the high-impedance state. This may cause the level to be undefined depending on external circuits. As described above, if the input level of an I/O port is left undefined, the power source current may flow because the potential applied to the input buffer in the MCU will be unstable. *1 Stand-by state: Stop mode by executing the STP instruction Wait mode by executing the WIT instruction 2. Modifying Output Data with Bit Handling Instruction When the port latch of an I/O port is modified with the bit handling instruction* 1 , the value of an unspecified bit may change. I/O ports can be set to input mode or output mode in byte units. When the port register is read or written, the following will be operated: * Port as input mode Read: Read the pin level Write: Write to the port latch * Port as output mode Read: Read the port latch or peripheral function output (specifications vary depending on the port) Write: Write to the port latch (output the content of the port latch from the pin) Meanwhile, the bit handling instructions are the read-modifywrite instructions*2. Executing the bit handling instruction to the port register allows reading and writing a bit unspecified with the instruction at the same time. If an unspecified bit is set to input mode, the pin level is read and the value is written to the port latch. At this time, if the original content of the port latch and the pin level do not match, the content of the port latch changes. If an unspecified bit is set to output mode, the port latch is normally read, but the peripheral function output is read in some ports and the value is written to the port latch. At this time, if the original content of the port latch and the peripheral function output do not match, the content of the port latch changes. *1 Bit handling instructions: CLB, SEB *2 Read-modify-write instruction: Reads 1-byte of data from memory, modifies the data, and writes 1-byte of the data to the original memory. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 119 of 131 38D2 Group 3. Direction Registers The values of the port direction registers cannot be read. This means, it is impossible to use the LDA instruction, memory operation instruction when the T flag is "1", addressing mode using direction register values as qualifiers, and bit test instructions such as BBC and BBS. It is also impossible to use bit operation instructions such as CLB and SEB, and read-modifywrite instructions to direction registers, including calculations such as ROR. To set the direction registers, use instructions such as LDM or STA. 4. Pull-Up Control Only for the pin set to input mode, pull-up is controlled by the PULL register and the segment output disable register. Notes on Termination of Unused Pins 1. Termination of Unused Pins Perform the following at the shortest possible distance (20 mm or less) from the MCU pins. (1) I/O ports Set the ports to input mode and connect each pin to VCC or VSS through a resistor of 1 k to 10 k. An internal pull-up resistor can also be used for the port where the internal pull-up resister is selectable. To set the ports to output mode, leave open at "L" or "H" output. * When setting the ports to output mode and leave open, input mode in the initial state remains until the mode of the ports are switched to output mode by a program after a reset. This may cause the voltage level of the pins to be undefined and the power source current to increase while the ports remains in input mode. For any effects on the system, careful system evaluations should be implemented on the user side. * The direction registers may be changed due to a program runaway or noise, so reset the registers periodically by a program to increase the program reliability. 2. Termination Concerns (1) When setting I/O ports to input mode [1] Do not leave open * The power source current may increase depending on the first-stage circuit. * The ports are more likely affected by noise when compared with the termination shown on the above "1. (1) I/O ports" [2] Do not connect to VCC or VSS directly If the direction registers are changed to output mode due to a program runaway or noise, a short circuit may occur. [3] Do not connect multiple ports in a lump to V CC or V SS through a resistor. If the direction registers are changed to output mode due to a program runaway or noise, a short circuit may occur between the ports. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 120 of 131 38D2 Group 1. Changing Related Register Settings If the interrupt occurrence synchronized with the following settings is not required, take the sequence shown below. * When selecting the external interrupt active edge * When selecting the interrupt source of the interrupt vector address where two or more interrupt sources are allocated 2. Checking Interrupt Request Bit To check the interrupt request bit with the BBC or BBS instruction immediately after this bit is set to "0", take the following sequence. If the BBC or BBS instruction is executed immediately after the interrupt request bit is set to "0", the bit value before being set to "0" is read. Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "0" (disabled). Set the interrupt request bit to "0" (no interrupt) Notes on Interrupts Set the interrupt edge selection bit (active edge switch bit) or interrupt (source) selection bit. NOP (one or more instructions) Execute the BBC or BBS instruction NOP (one or more instructions) Fig. 102 Sequence for setting interrupt request bit Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to "0" (no interrupt request). Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled). Fig. 101 Sequence for setting related register In the following cases, the interrupt request bit of the corresponding interrupt may be set to "1". * INT0 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 0 of interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16)) * INT1 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 1 of interrupt edge selection register) * INT2 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 2 of interrupt edge selection register) * CNTR0 active edge switch bits (bits 6 and 7 of timer X control register 1 (address 002E16)) * CNTR1 active edge switch bit (bits 6 of timer Y mode register (address 003816)) * INT2/Key input interrupt switch bit (bit 3 of interrupt edge selection register) * Timer Y/CNTR1 interrupt switch bit (bit 4 of interrupt edge selection register) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 121 of 131 3. Setting Unused Interrupts Set the interrupt enable bit of the unused interrupt to "0" (disabled). 38D2 Group Notes on Timers 8. Write Order to Timer X 1. Frequency Divider All timers shares one circuit for the frequency divider to generate the count source. Thus the frequency divider is not initialized when each individual timer is activated. When the frequency divider is selected as the count source, a one-cycle delay of the maximum count source will result between when the timer is activated and when it starts counting or outputs the waveform. The count source cannot be observed externally. (1) When timer mode, pulse output mode, event counter mode, or pulse width measurement mode is set, write to the following registers in the order below: The timer X register (extension) The timer X register (low-order) The timer X register (high-order) Writing to only one of these registers cannot be performed. When either of the above modes is set and timer X operates as a 16-bit counter, if the timer X register (extension) is never set after a reset release, setting the timer X register (extension) is not required. In that case, write the timer X register (low-order) first and the timer X register (high-order) next. However, once the timer X register (extension) is written, note that the value is retained in the reload latch. (2) Write to the timer X register by the 16-bit unit. Do not read the timer X register while write operation is performed. If the write operation is not completed, normal operation will not be performed. (3) When IGBT output mode or PWM mode is set, do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension). If "1" has been already written to the timer X register, be sure to write "0" to the register before use. Write to the following registers in the order below: The compare registers 1, 2, 3 (high- and low-order) The timer X register (extension) The timer X register (low-order) The timer X register (high-order) The compare registers (high- and low-order) can be written in either order. However, be sure to write both the compare registers 1, 2, 3 and the timer X register at the same time. 2. Division Ratio for Timer 1 to 4 The division ratio is 1/(n+1) when the value n (0 to 255) is written to the timer latch. 3. Switching Frequency and Count Source for Timer 1 to 4, X, and Y Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, X IN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. 4. Setting Timer 1 and 2 When STP Instruction Executed Before executing the STP instruction, first set the wait time at return. 5. Setting Order to Timer 1 to 4 When switching the count source of timer 1 to timer 4, a narrow pulse may be generated at the count input, which causes the timer count value to be undefined. Also, if the timers are used in cascade connection, a narrow pulse may be generated at the output when writing to the pervious timer, which causes the next timer count value to be undefined. Thus set the value from timer 1 in order after setting the count source of timer 1 to timer 4. 6. Write to Timer 2, 3, and 4 When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. At this time, count is stopped during write operation to the reload latch. 7. Timer 3 PWM0 Mode, Timer 4 PWM1 Mode (1) When PWM output is suspended once it starts, the time to resume outputting may be delayed one section (256 x ts) of the short interval depending on the level of the output pulse at that time: Stop at "H": No output delay Stop at "L": Output is delayed time of 256 x ts (2) When PWM mode is used, the interrupt requests and values of timer 3 and timer 4 are updated every cycle of the long interval (4 x 256 x ts). Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 122 of 131 9. Read Order to Timer X (1) In all modes, read the following registers in the order below: The timer X register (extension) The timer X register (high-order) The timer X register (low-order) When reading the timer X register (extension) is not required, read the timer X register (high-order) first and the timer X register (low-order) next. The read order to the compare registers 1, 2, 3 is not specified. (2) Read the timer X register in 16-bit units. Do not write to it during read operation. If read operation is terminated in progress, normal operation will not be performed. 38D2 Group 10. Write to Timer X (1) Timer X can select either writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only by the timer X write control bit (b3) in the timer X mode register (address 002D16). When writing to the latch only, if a value is written to the timer X address, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After a reset release, if a value is written to the timer X address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are written simultaneously. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the high-order reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. At this time, count is stopped during write operation to the high-order reload latch. (2) Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, X IN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. 11. Setting Timer X Mode Register When PWM mode or IGBT output mode is set, be sure to set the write control bit in the timer X mode register to "1" (writing to latch only). After writing to the timer X register (high-order), the contents of both registers are simultaneously reflected in the output waveform at the next underflow. 12. Timer X Output Control Functions To use the output control functions (INT1 and INT2 ), set the levels of INT1 and INT2 to "H" for the falling edge active or to "L" for the rising edge active before switching to IGBT output mode. 13. CNTR0 Active Edge Selection (1) Setting the CNTR0 active edge switch bits also affects the interrupt active edge at the same time. (2) When the pulse width is measured, set bit 7 of the CNTR0 active edge switch bits to "0". 14. When Timer X Pulse Width Measurement Mode Used When timer X pulse mode measurement mode is used, enable the event counter wind control data (bit 5 of timer X mode register (address 002D16)) by setting to "0". If the event counter window control data (bit 5 of timer X mode r egister (address 002 D 1 6 )) is set to "1" (disabled) to enable/disable the CNTR0 input, the input is not accepted after the timer 1 underflow. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 123 of 131 15. CNTR1 Active Edge Selection Setting the CNTR 1 active edge switch bits also affects the interrupt active edge at the same time. However, in pulse width HL continuous HL measurement mode, the CNTR 1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of the pin regardless of the settings of the CNTR1 active edge switch bits. 16. Read from/Write to Timer Y (1) When reading from/writing to timer Y, read from/write to both the high-order and low-order bytes of timer Y. To read the value, read the high-order bytes first and the low-order bytes next. To write the value, write the low-order bytes first and the high-order bytes next. Writing/reading should be preformed in 16-bit units. If write/read operation is changed in progress, normal operation will not be performed. (2) Timer Y can select either writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only by the timer Y write control bit (b0) in the timer Y control register (address 003916). When writing to the latch only, if a value is written to the timer Y address, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After a reset release, if a value is written to the timer Y address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are written simultaneously. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the high-order reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. At this time, count is stopped during write operation to the high-order reload latch. (3) Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, X IN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. 17. Real time port control When switching the setting of the real time port control bits between valid and invalid, write to the timer Y mode register in byte units with the LDM or STA instruction so that both bits are switched at the same time. Also, before using this function, set the P46 and P47 port direction registers to output. 38D2 Group Notes on Serial I/O1 Becaouse the operation of the serial I/O2 is as same as serial I/O1, the following notes are written about the serial I/O1. 1. Write to Baud Rate Generator Write to the baud rate generator while transmission/reception is stopped. 2. Setting Sequence When Serial I/O1 Transmit Interrupt Used To use the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, if the interrupt occurrence synchronized with settings is not required, take the following sequence: (1) Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit (bit 2 of interrupt control register 2 (address 003F 16 )) to "0" (disabled). (2) Set the transmit enable bit to "1". (3) After one or more instructions have been executed, set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit (bit 2 of interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16)) to "0" (no interrupt). (4) Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled). When the transmit enable bit is set to "1", the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0 of serial I/O1 status register) and the transmit shift completion flag are set to "1". This allows an interrupt request to be generated regardless of which interrupt occurrence source has been selected by the transmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3 of serial I/O1 control register) and the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit is set to "1". 3. Data Transmission Control Using Transmit Shift Completion Flag After transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register, the transmit shift completion flag (bit 2 of serial I/O1 status register (address 001916)) changes from "1" to "0" after a delay of 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the system clock. Thus, after transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register, note this delay when controlling data transmission by referencing the transmit shift completion flag. 4. Setting Serial I/O1 Control Register Before setting the serial I/O1 control register again, first set both the transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to "0" and initialize the transmission and reception circuits. Set both the transmit enable bit (TE) and the receive enable bit (RE) to "0" Set bits 0 to 3, and 6 of the serial I/O1 control register. Set both the transmit enable bit (TE) and the receive enable bit (RE), or one of them to "1". Settings can be made with the LDM instruction at the same time Fig. 103 Sequence of setting serial I/O1 control register 5. Pin Status After Transmission Completed After transmission is completed, the TxD pin retains the level when transmission is completed. When the internal clock is selected in clock synchronous serial I/O mode, the SCLK1 pin is set to "H". Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 124 of 131 6. Serial I/O1 Enable Bit during Transmit Operation During transmission, if the serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7 of serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16 )) is set to "0", the pin function is set to an I/O port and the internal transmit operation continues even though transmit data is not output externally. Also, if the transmit buffer register is written in this state, transmit operation starts internally. If the serial I/O1 enable bit is set to "1" at this time, transmit data is output to the TxD pin from that point. 7. Transmission Control When External Clock Selected During data transmission, if the external clock is selected as the synchronous clock, set the transmit enable bit to "1" while SCLK1 is set to "H". Also, write to the transmit buffer register while SCLK1 is set to "H". 8. Receive Operation in Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode During reception in clock synchronous serial I/O mode, set both the transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to "1". Then write dummy data to the transmit buffer register. When the internal clock is selected as the synchronous clock, the synchronous clock is output at this point and receive operation starts. When the external clock is selected, reception is enabled at this point and inputting the external clock starts transmit operation. The P55/TXD1 [P32/TxD2] pin outputs dummy data written in the transmit buffer register. 9. Transmit/Receive Operation in Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode In clock synchronous serial I/O mode, set the transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to "0" simultaneously to stop transmit/receive operations. If only one of the operations is stopped, transmission and reception cannot be synchronized, which will cause a bit error. 38D2 Group Notes on A/D Conversion 1. Analog Input Pin Set the signal source impedance for analog input low, or equip an analog input pin with an external capacitor of 0.01 F to 1 F. In addition, operations of application products should be verified thoroughly on the user side. An analog input pin has a built-in capacitor for analog voltage comparison. Thus if a signal from the high impedance signal source is input to the analog input pin, charge and discharge noise will be generated. This may cause the A/D conversion/comparison accuracy to drop. 2. Clock Frequency during A/D Conversion The comparator input consists of a capacity coupling. If the conversion rate is too low, the A/D conversion accuracy may deteriorate due to a charge lost, so set f(XIN) 500 kHz or more for A/D conversion in XIN mode. Also, do not execute the STP or WIT instruction during A/D conversion. In low-speed mode (when on-chip oscillator is selected), as A/D conversion is performed using the internal on-chip oscillator, there is no limit on the minimum frequency for f(XIN). 3. ADKEY Function When the ADKEY enable bit is set to "1", the analog input pin selection bits are disabled. Do not execute the A/D conversion by a program while ADKEY is enabled. Enabling ADKEY does not change bits 0 to 2 of ADCON. 4. A/D Conversion Immediately After ADKEY Function Started In the ADKEY function, A/D conversion is not performed to the analog input voltage immediately after starting the function. This causes the A/D conversion result immediately after starting the function to be undefined. If the A/D conversion result of the analog input voltage applied to the ADKEY pin is required, select the analog input pin corresponding to ADKEY before performing A/D conversion. 5. Input Voltage Applied to ADKEY Pin Set the input to the ADKEY pin into a steep falling waveform and stabilize the input voltage within eight cycles (1 s when f(XIN) = 8 MHz) from the moment the input voltage reaches VIL or lower. The actual threshold voltage for the ADKEY pin is between VIH and VIL. To prevent unnecessary ADKEY operation due to noise or other factors, set the ADKEY pin voltage to VIH (0.9 VCC) or more while the input is waited. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 125 of 131 6. Register Operation during A/D Conversion The A/D conversion operation is not guaranteed if the following are preformed: * The CPU mode register is operated during A/D conversion operation * The AD control register is operated during A/D conversion operation * The STP or WIT instruction is executed during A/D conversion operation 7. A/D Converter Power Source Pin Connect to the A/D converter power source pin to AVSS or VSS whether the A/D conversion function is used or not. If the AVSS pin is left open, the MCU may operate incorrectly because the pin will be affected by noise or other factors. 38D2 Group Notes on LCD Drive Control Circuit 1. Setting Data to LCD Display RAM To write data to the LCD display RAM when the LCD enable bit is set to "1" and while LCD is turned on, set fixed data. Rewriting with temporary data may cause LCD to flicker. The following shows a processing example to write data to the LCD display RAM while LCD is turned on. (1) Ccorrect processing *Content at address 0040 16: "FF16" LCD on Off LCD on or off? On LCD on or off Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "FF16" Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "0016" Set fixed data to LCD display RAM (2) Incorrect processing *Content at address 0040 16: "FF16" LCD on Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "0016" LCD off Set off data to LCD display RAM Off LCD on or off? On LCD on or off Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "FF16" Set fixed data to LCD display RAM Fig. 104 Processing example when writing data to LCD display RAM While LCD Turned On Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 126 of 131 38D2 Group 2. Executing STP Instruction Execution of the STP instruction sets the LCD enable bit (bit 3 of the LCD mode register) and bits 0 to 5 and bit 7 of the LCD power control register to "0" and the LCD panel turns off. To make the LCD panel turn on after returning from the stop mode, set these bits to "1". 5. Using No ROM Correction Function If the ROM correction function is not used, the ROM correction vector can be used as normal RAM/ROM. When using as normal RAM/ROM, be sure to set bits 1 and 0 of the ROM correction enable register to "0" (disabled). Notes on Clock Generating Circuit 3. VL3 Pin To use the LCD drive control circuit while VL3 is set to the voltage equal to VCC, apply the VCC voltage to the VL3 pin and write "1" to the V L3 connection bit of LCD power control register (address 003816)). 4. LCD Drive Power Supply Power supply capacitor may be insufficient with the division resistance for LCD power supply, and the characteristic of the LCD panel. In this case, there is the method of connecting the bypass capacitor about 0.1 - 0.33 F to V L1 - V L3 pins. The example of a strengthening measure of the LCD drive power supply is shown below. VL3 VL2 * Connect by the shortest possible wiring. * Connect the bypass capacitor to the VL1 -VL3 pins as short as possible. (Referential value:0.1-0.33 F) VL1 Fig. 105 Strengthening measure example of LCD drive power supply Notes on ROM Correction Function 1. Returning to Main Program To return to the main program from the correction program, use the JMP instruction (3-byte instruction). 2. Using ROM Correction Function If the ROM correction function is used, be sure to enable the ROM correction enable bit after setting the ROM correction register. 3. Address Do not set addresses other than the ROM area in the ROM correction address registers. Also, do not set the same address in the ROM correction address 1 register and the ROM correction address 2 register. 4. ROM Correction Process Include the ROM correction process in the program beforehand. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 127 of 131 1. Oscillation Circuit Constants The oscillation circuit constants vary depending on the resonator. Use values recommended by the oscillator manufacturer. A feed-back resistor is implemented between the XIN and XOUT pins (an external feed-back resistor may be required depending on conditions). As no feed-back resistor is implemented between XCIN and XCOUT, add a feedback resistor of about 10 M. 2. Transition between Modes When the MCU transits between on-chip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode, both the XIN and XCIN oscillations must be stabilized. Be especially careful when turning the power on and returning from stop mode. Refer to the clock state transition diagram for a transition between each mode. Also, set the frequency in the condition that f(XIN) 3 x (XCIN). When X IN mode is not used (the X IN -X OUT oscillation or external clock input to XIN is not performed), connect XIN to VCC through a resistor. 3. Oscillation Stabilization Before executing the STP instruction, set the values * to generate the wait time required for oscillation stabilization to timer 1 latch and timer 2 latch (low-order 8 bits of timer 1 and high-order 8 bits of timer 2). *Referential values (Set values according to your oscillator and system) * OSCSEL = "L" in the flash memory and QzROM versions: ..................................................................... 000516 or more * OSCSEL = "H" in the QzROM version: .....................................................................01FF16 or more 4. Low-Speed Mode, XIN Mode To use low-speed mode or X IN mode, wait until oscillation stabilizes after enabling the X IN -X OUT and X CIN -X COUT oscillation, then switch to the mode. 38D2 Group Notes on Flash Memory Mode * CPU Rewrite Mode (1) Operating Speed During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock to 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). (2) Prohibited Instructions During CPU rewrite mode, the instructions which reference data in the flash memory cannot be used. (3) Interrupts During CPU rewrite mode, interrupts cannot be used because they reference data in the flash memory. (4) Watchdog Timer If the watchdog timer has been running already, the internal reset by underflow will not occur because the watchdog timer is continuously cleared during program or erase operation. (5) Reset Reset is always valid. If CNVSS = "H" when a reset is released, boot mode is active. The program starts from the address stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16 in boot ROM area. Notes on Watchdog Timer 1. Watchdog Timer Underflow The watchdog timer does not operate in stop mode, but it continues counting during the wait time to release the stop state and in wait mode. Write to the watchdog timer control register so that the watchdog timer will not underflow during these periods. 2. Stopping On-Chip Oscillator Oscillation When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2, the on-chip oscillator forcibly oscillates and it cannot be stopped. Also, in this time, set the STP instruction function selection bit to "1" at this time. Select "0" (SOURCE) for the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 at the system which on-chip oscillator is stopped. 3. Watchdog Timer Control Register Bits 7 to 5 can be rewritten only once after a reset. After writing, rewriting is disabled because they are locked. These bits are set to "0" after a reset. Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 128 of 131 Notes on Differences between QzROM Version and Flash Memory Version The flash memory and QzROM versions differ in their manufacturing processes, built-in ROM, memory size, and layout patterns. Because of these differences, characteristic values, operation margins, noise immunity, and noise radiation and oscillation circuit constants may vary within the specified range of electrical characteristics. When switching to the QzROM version, implement system evaluations equivalent to those performed in the flash memory version. Confirm page 11 about the differences of functions. Notes on Power Source Voltage When the power supply voltage value of the MCU is less than the value indicated in the recommended operating conditions, the MCU may not operate normally and perform unstable operation. In a system where the power source voltage drops slowly when the power source voltage drops or the power is turned off, reset the MCU when the power source voltage is less than the recommended operating conditions, and design the system so that this unstable operation does not cause errors to it. Notes on Handling Power Source Pins Before using the MCU, connect a capacitor suitable for high frequencies as a bypass capacitor between the following: The power source pin (VCC pin) and the GND pin (VSS pin) The power source pin (VCC pin) and the analog power source input pin (AVSS pin). As a bypass capacitor, a ceramic capacitor of 0.01 F to 0.1 F is recommended. Also, use the shortest possible wiring to connect a bypass capacitor between the power source pin and the GND pin and between the power source pin and the analog power source pin. Notes on Memory 1. RAM The RAM content is undefined at a reset. Be sure to set the initial value before use. 38D2 Group Notes on QzROM Version Wiring to OSCSEL pin (1) OSCSEL = L Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the V S S pin of the microcomputer. (2) OSCSEL = H Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the VCC pattern which is supplied to the V CC pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the VCC could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the VCC pattern which is supplied to the VCC pin of the microcomputer. The OSCSEL pin is the power source input pin for the built-in QzROM. When programming in the QzROM, the impedance of the OSCSEL pin is low to allow the electric current for writing to flow into the built-in QzROM. Because of this, noise can enter easily. If noise enters the OSCSEL pin, abnormal instruction codes or data are read from the QzROM, which may cause a program runaway. Termination of OSCSEL pin (2) OSCSEL = H (1) OSCSEL = L (1) (1) The shortest The shortest VCC OSCSEL about 5 k about 5 k OSCSEL VSS (1) The shortest (1) The shortest Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin QzROM Version Product Shipped in Blank As for the product shipped in blank, Renesas does not perform the writing test to user ROM area after the assembly process though the QzROM writing test is performed enough before the assembly process. Therefore, a writing error of approximate 0.1% may occur. Moreover, please note the contact of cables and foreign bodies on a socket, etc. because a writing environment may cause some writing errors. Ordering QzROM Writing 1. Notes On QzROM Writing Orders When ordering the QzROM product shipped after writing, submit the mask file (extension: .msk) which is made by the mask file converter MM. * Be sure to set the ROM option data* setup when making the mask file by using the mask file converter MM.. The ROM code protect is specified according to the ROM option data* in the mask file which is submitted at ordering. Note that the mask file which has nothing at the ROM option data* or has the data other than "00 16 ", "FE 16 " and "FF 16 " can not be accepted. * Set "FF16" to the ROM code protect address in ROM data regardless of the presence or absence of a protect. When data other than "FF16" is set, we may ask that the ROM data be submitted again. * ROM option data: mask option noted in MM 2. Data Required for QzROM Ordering The following are necessary when ordering a QzROM product shipped after writing: * QzROM Writing Confirmation Form* * Mark Specification Form* * ROM data: Mask file * For the QzROM writing confirmation form and the mark specification form, refer to the "Renesas Technology Corp." Homepage (http://www.renesas.com/homepage.jsp). Note that we cannot deal with special font marking (customer's trademark etc.) in QzROM microcomputer. Fig. 106 Wiring for OSCSEL pin Overvoltage in QzROM Version Make sure that voltage exceeding the VCC pin voltage is not applied to other pins. In particular, ensure that the state indicated by bold lines in figure below does not occur for pin OSCSEL pin (VPP power source pin for QzROM) during power-on or poweroff. Otherwise the contents of QzROM could be rewritten. (1) 1.8V (2) 1.8V VCC pin voltage OSCSEL pin voltage "H" input OSCSEL pin voltage "L" input (1) Input voltage to other MCU pins rises before VCC pin voltage. (2) Input voltage to other MCU pins falls after VCC pin voltage. Note: The internal circuitry is unstable when VCC is below the minimum voltage specification of 1.8 V (shaded portion), so particular care should be exercised regarding overvoltage. Fig. 107 Timing Diagram (Bold-lined periods are applicable) Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 129 of 131 3. QzROM Product Receiving Procedure When writing to QzROM is performed by user side, the receiving inspection by the following flow is necessary. 38D2 Group QzROM product shipped after writing QzROM product shipped in blank "protect disabled" "protect enabled to the protect area 1" Renesas Renesas Programming Shipping Verify test Shipping User Receiving inspection (Blank check) User Receiving inspection of unprotected area (Verify test) Programming Programming to unprotected area Verify test for all area Verify test for unprotected area Fig. 108 QzROM receiving procedure Notes on Flash Memory Version CPU Rewrite Mode 1. Operating Speed Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 130 of 131 38D2 Group During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). 2. Prohibited Instructions The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash memory cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode. 3. Interrupts The interrupts cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode because they refer to the internal data of the flash memory. 4. Watchdog Timer In case of the watchdog timer has been running already, the internal reset generated by watchdog timer underflow does not happen, because of watchdog timer is always clearing during program or erase operation. 5. Reset Reset is always valid. In case of CNVSS = "H" when reset is released, boot mode is active. So the program starts from the address contained in address FFFC16 and FFFD16 in boot ROM area. CNVSS Pin The CNVSS pin determines the flash memory mode. Connect the CNVSS pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k. resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the V S S pin of the microcomputer. Note. When the boot mode or the standard serial I/O mode is used, a switch of the input level to the CNVSS pin is required. (1) The shortest CNVSS Approx. 5k VSS (1) The shortest Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin. Fig. 109 Wiring for CNVSS pin Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302 Page 131 of 131 REVISION HISTORY 38D2 Group Datasheet Rev. Date Description 1.00 Jan. 23, 2006 - First edition issued 2.00 Mar. 24, 2006 1 FEATURES : Description of reset circuit eliminated and Power source voltage revised. 3 Performance overview: Oscillation frequency and Power source voltage revised. 4 FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM : Description of reset circuit eliminated. 7 Fig. 4 and Table 3 38D29GC, 38D29G8 added. 12 Fig. 9 Memory map diagram revised. 15 Table 7 Non-port function of port P54-P57 revised. Related SFRs of port P40 and P41 revised. 18 Fig. 15 (18) Port P61 revised. 26 Fig. 22 Timer 12 mode register revised. 29 Notes on Timer X: (1), (2) revised. Page 32 * Real Time Port Control revised. 36 Fig. 32 UART control register revised. 38 Fig. 34 Note 1 revised. 42 Fig. 38 Note 2 revised. 48 Fig. 46 Memory map revised. 49 Note 1 revised. 50 Clock output function revised. 51 Reset circuit revised. 53 (1)Stop mode: Description revised. 54 Fig. 58 SOURCE added. 55 Fig. 60 State transitions of system clock: Note 3 revised. 56 Address of oscillation ouput control register revised. 60 65-75 2.01 Nov. 15, 2006 Summary Fig. 64 Connection of XIN and XOUT revised. Electrical characteristics added. 1 DESCRIOTION revised Power dissipation described. 3 Main clock / Sub-clock generating circuits: Built-in feed back resistor Built-in Power dissipation described. 5 AVSS: GND input pin Analog power source input pin 12 ROM and ROM Code Protect Address : Description revised. Fig. 9 is revised. 15 Table 7 : As for CKOUT, non-port function and related SFRs are added. 19 Termination of unused pins : As for I/O ports, description added. VL3 : Terminations 1 and 2 revised. 25 Timer 1, Timer 2 : Description revised. 28 Timer X : Description revised. 29 Fig. 24 : TXCON1 bit 5 = 1 TXCON1 bit 5 = 0 31 Timer Y : Description revised. Fig. 26 : Note added. 37 Fig. 33 : Note and source added. (1/4) REVISION HISTORY Rev. Date 2.01 Nov. 15, 2006 38D2 Group Datasheet Description Page LCD Power Circuit * Description added * Fig. 38 : Note 3 eliminated * Fig. 39 : Bit name described 48 Fig. 46 : Reserved ROM area address revised. ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION : Description added. 49 Fig. 48 : On-chip oscillator On-chip oscillator/4 Note added. Fig. 49 : On-chip oscillator On-chip oscillator/4 source/1024 Count sorce/1024 source/4 Count sorce/4 53 (5) Low-speed Mode : Description added 54 Fig. 58 : Note added and circuit expression is revised. 56 Fig. 61 : Circuit expression is revised. 57 Table 12: As for VREF and AVSS, function revised. 59 to 62 3.01 Sep.18, 2007 Summary 42 Fig. 63 to Fig. 66 added and revised. 71 Table 17 IIH and IIL : OSCSEL added. 75 Table 23: Note revised. - Flash memory version function: added 1 DESCRIPTION: flash memory version contents added FEATURES: flash memory version contents added Power source voltages: flash memory version contents added Power dissipation: flash memory version contents added Flash memory mode: added 2 Fig. 1: Note is added 3 Table 1: Power source voltage: revised and flash memory version contents added Power dissipation: flash memory version contents added 5 Table 2: LED0 to 7 and KW0 to 3 are added to pin name 6 Pin discription table is divided (to Table 2 and Table 3) Table 3: CNVSS pin is added 7 Fig. 3: F (Flash memory) is added to memory type 8 Flash memory size is added Fig. 4: Some "Under developing" are erased 9 Table 3: Flash memory version products are added 10 Table 5 "Differences between QzROM and flash memory versions" and "Notes on Differences between QzROM and Flash Memory Versions" are added 12 Fig. 6: "Push contents of processor status register on stack" position is moved 14 CPU mode register explanation is revised Fig. 7: Some notes are added 15 Fig. 8: Flash memory version flow is added 16 Fig. 9: Flash memory version SRF is added 17 Fig. 10: Flash memory version SRF and notes are added 19 Table 2: LED0 to 7 and KW0 to 3 are added to pin name 24-28 "Interrupt" is wholly revised 32 "Frequency Divider for Timer" is revised 35 "Frequency Divider for Timer" is revised (2/4) REVISION HISTORY Rev. Date 3.01 Sep.18, 2007 38D2 Group Datasheet Description Page Summary 35 "(6) Pulse Width Measurement Mode" is revised 36 "(3) Write To Timer X" is revised 37 "(7) When Timer X Pulse Width Measurement Mode Used" 38 "(5) Real Time Port Control" is added 39 "Notes on Timer Y" is revised 44 "Conparator and Control Circuit" is revised 45 Fig. 37: Revised "ADKEY Control Circuit" is revised 56 "Initial value of watchdog timer" is revised "Bit 6 of Watchdog Timer Control Register" and "" are revised Fig. 51: Revised Fig. 52: Revised 57 Fig. 54: Revised "[RRF register (RRFR)]" is added 58 Explaination is revised Fig. 56: revised Fig. 57: Notes are added 59 Fig. 58: Revised 60 Explanation is revised 62 Fig. 61: Revised 63 Fig. 62: Revised 65 Table 14: Revised 71-88 "Flash Memory Mode" is added 89 Revised to "Notes on Use" from "Notes on Programming" contents 90 Added "NOTES on QzROM VERSION" 91 Added "NOTES on FLASH MEMORY VERSION" and "NOTES ON DIFFERENCES BETWEEN QzROM VERSION AND FLASH MEMORY VERSION" 94 Table 21: Revised 95-101 Table 22 to 29: "VSS=0V" are added to condition 95 Table 22: VIL of XCIN is deleted 98 Table 25: "VCC = 4.0 t o 5.0 V" "VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V" 100 Table 28: * ABS of 10bitAD mode "2.2V < VCC 4.0V" "2.2V VCC 4.0V" "1.8V VCC 5.5V" "2.0V VCC 5.5V" * ABS of 8bitAD mode "2.2V < VCC 4.0V" "2.2V VCC 4.0V" "1.8V VCC 5.5V" "2.0V VCC 5.5V" * tCONV is separated to 10bitAD mode and 8bitADmode, and note is added 102 Table 30: TC, TwH, and TwL of XIN "4.5 V to 5.5 V" "4.5V VCC 5.5V" "4.0 V to 5.5 V" "4.0V VCC 5.5V" Table 31: TC of XIN and CNTR, and TwH and TwL of XIN "2.0V < VCC 4.0V" "2.0V VCC 4.0V" "VCC 2.0V" "VCC < 2.0V" 104 Fig. 95: XCIN timing is deleted 105-115 Flash memory version electrical characteristics is added (3/4) REVISION HISTORY 38D2 Group Datasheet Rev. Date Description 3.01 Sep.18, 2007 118-131 3.02 Apr. 09, 2008 2 Fig. 1: Revised 3 Table 1: Revised Page Summary Appendix is added 5 Table 2: Revised 18 "Direction Registers": Peripheral output name is added and deleted 21 Fig. 14: Revised 23 Table 9: Revised 25 "External Interrupt Pin Selection" is deleted 26 Fig. 17:Revised 29 Port name is revised 34 Fig. 26: Revised 38 "Timer Y" is revised 44 Fig. 36: Revised 49 Fig. 41: Revised 57 Fig. 53 and 54 are revised 58 Fig. 56: Revised 63 Fig. 63: Revised 64 Fig. 63: Revised 65 Table 14: Revised 66 Fig. 65: Revised 74 Fig. 73: Revised 85 Fig. 80: Revised 86 Fig. 81: Revised 90 Notes On ROM Code Protect is revised 95 Table 22: Revised 99 Table 27: Revised 102 Table 30: Revised 109 NOTE of Table 38: Revised 110 Table 40: Revised 129 Notes On ROM Code Protect is revised (4/4) Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan Notes: 1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document. 2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples. 3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations. 4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com ) 5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document. 6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products. 7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above. 8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below: (1) artificial life support devices or systems (2) surgical implantations (3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.) (4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications. 9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges. 10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. 11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment. 12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas. 13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries. http://www.renesas.com RENESAS SALES OFFICES Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K. Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120 Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7858/7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2377-3473 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. 10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 3518-3399 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd. Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145 Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510 (c) 2008. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. Colophon .7.2